Cisco Systems Automobile Parts 1105 User Manual

Us e r Gu id e fo r t h e Cis c o Wo rk s 110 5  
Wire le s s LAN S o lu t io n En g in e  
Co rp o ra t e He a d q u a rt e rs  
Cisco System s, Inc.  
170 West Tasm an Drive  
San J ose, CA 95134-1706  
USA  
Tel: 408 526-4000  
800 553-NETS (6387)  
Fax: 408 526-4100  
Custom er Order Num ber: DOC-7814092=  
Text Part Num ber: 78-14092-01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O N T E N T S  
Preface xi  
Audience xi  
Conventions xi  
Related Documentation xii  
Obtaining Documentation xiii  
World Wide Web xiii  
Ordering Documentation xiv  
Documentation Feedback xiv  
Obtaining Technical Assistance xv  
Cisco.com xv  
Technical Assistance Center xv  
C H A P T E R  
1
Getting Started with the Wireless LAN Solution Engine 1-1  
Overview of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine 1-1  
Date and Time Display on the WLSE 1-2  
Getting Started 1-3  
Logging Out 1-4  
C H A P T E R  
2
Fault Monitoring 2-1  
Displaying Faults 2-1  
Viewing Fault Details 2-6  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Specifying Fault Thresholds 2-7  
Setting Access Point Fault Thresholds 2-8  
Setting Switch Fault Thresholds 2-10  
Setting LEAP Server Response Time 2-12  
Specifying Policies 2-13  
Forwarding Faults 2-15  
Setting Trap Notification 2-16  
Setting Syslog Notification 2-17  
Emailing Faults 2-18  
C H A P T E R  
3
Configuring Devices 3-1  
Using the Templates 3-1  
Template Choices 3-2  
Creating a Template 3-90  
Copying a Template 3-91  
Editing a Template 3-91  
Deleting a Template 3-92  
Managing Configuration Jobs 3-92  
Job Choices 3-93  
Creating a Configuration Job 3-99  
Viewing Configuration Job Status 3-99  
C H A P T E R  
4
Using Reports 4-1  
Displaying Wireless Client Reports 4-1  
Displaying a Client Detail Report 4-2  
Displaying a Client Statistics Report 4-3  
Displaying a Client Historical Association Report 4-5  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Displaying Current Reports 4-6  
Displaying a Current Client Association Report 4-15  
Displaying an EAP Authentication Report 4-16  
Displaying a Switch Summary Report 4-17  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Connected to Switch Report 4-18  
Displaying a Router Summary Report 4-19  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Connected to Router Report 4-20  
Displaying Trends 4-21  
Displaying a Group Performance Report: RF Utilization 4-22  
Displaying a Group Performance Report: Ethernet Utilization 4-23  
Displaying an AP and Bridge RF Transmission Statistics 4-24  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Ethernet Transmission Statistics 4-25  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Performance: Graph 4-26  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Performance: Tabular 4-27  
Emailing a Report 4-28  
Scheduling Email Jobs 4-29  
Viewing Email Job Details 4-31  
C H A P T E R  
5
Performing Administrative Tasks 5-1  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices 5-2  
Managing Device Discovery 5-2  
Managing Devices 5-13  
Running Inventory Now 5-17  
Setting Device Credentials 5-17  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Importing Devices 5-21  
Exporting Devices 5-24  
Managing LEAP Servers 5-26  
Managing Groups 5-28  
Overview: Groups 5-28  
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Groups 5-29  
Managing the Appliance 5-34  
Managing the Software 5-37  
Overview: Security 5-45  
Managing Security 5-45  
Backing Up and Restoring Data 5-50  
Using Diagnostics 5-52  
Administering Users 5-60  
Managing Users 5-62  
Using Connectivity Tools 5-66  
C H A P T E R  
C H A P T E R  
A P P E N D I X  
6
7
Frequently Asked Questions 6-1  
Troubleshooting 7-1  
A
Naming Guidelines A-1  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
A P P E N D I X  
B
Command Reference B-1  
Using the CLI B-2  
CLI Conventions B-2  
Command Privileges B-2  
Command History Feature B-3  
Help for CLI Commands B-3  
Command Summary B-4  
Command Description Conventions B-9  
Privilege Level 0 Commands B-10  
exit B-10  
ping B-10  
show clock B-11  
show domain-name B-12  
show interfaces B-13  
show process B-13  
show version B-14  
traceroute B-15  
Privilege Level 15 Commands B-16  
auth B-16  
backup B-17  
backupconfig B-18  
cdp B-19  
clock B-20  
df B-22  
erase config B-22  
firewall B-23  
gethostbyname B-24  
hostname B-25  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
vii  
Contents  
import B-25  
install configure B-27  
install list B-28  
install update B-29  
interface B-29  
ip domain-name B-31  
ip name-server B-32  
listbackup B-33  
mail B-34  
mailcntrl clear B-34  
mailcntrl list B-35  
mailroute B-36  
nslookup B-36  
ntp server B-37  
reload B-39  
reinitdb B-40  
repository B-40  
repository add B-41  
repository delete B-42  
repository list B-43  
repository server B-44  
restore B-45  
route B-46  
services B-46  
show anilog B-48  
show auth-cli B-49  
show auth-http B-49  
show backupconfig B-50  
show bootlog B-51  
show cdp neighbor B-52  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
show cdp run B-52  
show collectorlog B-53  
show config B-54  
show dmgtdlog B-56  
show hseaccesslog B-57  
show hseerrorlog B-58  
show hsesslaccesslog B-59  
show import B-59  
show install logs B-60  
show ipchains B-60  
show hosts B-61  
show maillog B-62  
show proc B-62  
show repository B-63  
show route B-64  
show securitylog B-64  
show snmp-server B-66  
show ssh-version B-66  
show syslog B-67  
show tech B-68  
show telnetenable B-68  
show tomcatlog B-69  
shutdown B-70  
snmp-server B-71  
ssh B-71  
ssh-version B-72  
telnet B-72  
telnetenable B-73  
username B-74  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
ix  
Contents  
Maintenance Image Commands B-75  
erase config B-75  
fsck B-76  
reload B-76  
G
L O S S A R Y  
I
N D E X  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
This manual describes the Wireless LAN Solution Engine and provides  
instructions for using it.  
Audience  
This document is for system administrators responsible for managing a wireless  
network who are familiar with some of the concepts and terminology of Ethernet  
and wireless local area networking.  
Conventions  
This document uses the following conventions:  
Item  
Convention  
Commands and keywords  
Variables for which you supply values  
Displayed session and system information  
Information you enter  
boldface font  
italic font  
screen font  
boldface screen font  
italic screen font  
Variables you enter  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Preface  
Related Documentation  
Item  
Convention  
Menu items and button names  
Selecting a menu item  
boldface font  
Option>Network Preferences  
Note  
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to  
material not covered in the publication.  
Caution  
Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could  
result in equipment damage or loss of data.  
Related Documentation  
Note  
Although every effort has been made to validate the accuracy of the  
information in the printed and electronic documentation, you should also  
review the [product] documentation on Cisco.com for any updates.  
The following additional documentation is available:  
Paper Documentation  
Installation and Configuration Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wirless LAN  
Solution Engine  
Quick Start Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wirleless LAN Solution Engine  
Release Notes for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the CiscoWorks 1105  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preface  
Obtaining Documentation  
Online Documentation  
Online help—Access the online help by clicking on the Help tab.  
PDF for:  
Installation and Configuration Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wirless  
LAN Solution Engine  
Quick Start Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wirleless LAN Solution  
Engine  
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the CiscoWorks 1105  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Note  
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 is required.  
Obtaining Documentation  
The following sections explain how to obtain documentation from Cisco Systems.  
World Wide Web  
You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at  
the following URL:  
Translated documentation is available at the following URL:  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Preface  
Obtaining Documentation  
Ordering Documentation  
Cisco documentation is available in the following ways:  
Registered Cisco Direct Customers can order Cisco product documentation  
from the Networking Products MarketPlace:  
Registered Cisco.com users can order the Documentation CD-ROM through  
the online Subscription Store:  
Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local  
account representative by calling Cisco corporate headquarters (California,  
USA) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere in North America, by calling  
800 553-NETS (6387).  
Documentation Feedback  
If you are reading Cisco product documentation on Cisco.com, you can submit  
technical comments electronically. Click Feedback at the top of the Cisco  
Documentation home page. After you complete the form, print it out and fax it to  
Cisco at 408 527-0730.  
You can e-mail your comments to [email protected].  
To submit your comments by mail, use the response card behind the front cover  
of your document, or write to the following address:  
Cisco Systems  
170 West Tasman Drive  
San Jose, CA 95134-9883  
We appreciate your comments.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preface  
Obtaining Technical Assistance  
Obtaining Technical Assistance  
Cisco provides Cisco.com as a starting point for all technical assistance.  
Customers and partners can obtain documentation, troubleshooting tips, and  
sample configurations from online tools by using the Cisco Technical Assistance  
Center (TAC) Web Site. Cisco.com registered users have complete access to the  
technical support resources on the Cisco TAC Web Site.  
Cisco.com  
Cisco.com is the foundation of a suite of interactive, networked services that  
provides immediate, open access to Cisco information, networking solutions,  
services, programs, and resources at any time, from anywhere in the world.  
Cisco.com is a highly integrated Internet application and a powerful, easy-to-use  
tool that provides a broad range of features and services to help you to  
Streamline business processes and improve productivity  
Resolve technical issues with online support  
Download and test software packages  
Order Cisco learning materials and merchandise  
Register for online skill assessment, training, and certification programs  
You can self-register on Cisco.com to obtain customized information and service.  
To access Cisco.com, go to the following URL:  
Technical Assistance Center  
The Cisco TAC is available to all customers who need technical assistance with a  
Cisco product, technology, or solution. Two types of support are available through  
the Cisco TAC: the Cisco TAC Web Site and the Cisco TAC Escalation Center.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Preface  
Obtaining Technical Assistance  
Inquiries to Cisco TAC are categorized according to the urgency of the issue:  
Priority level 4 (P4)—You need information or assistance concerning Cisco  
product capabilities, product installation, or basic product configuration.  
Priority level 3 (P3)—Your network performance is degraded. Network  
functionality is noticeably impaired, but most business operations continue.  
Priority level 2 (P2)—Your production network is severely degraded,  
affecting significant aspects of business operations. No workaround is  
available.  
Priority level 1 (P1)—Your production network is down, and a critical impact  
to business operations will occur if service is not restored quickly. No  
workaround is available.  
Which Cisco TAC resource you choose is based on the priority of the problem and  
the conditions of service contracts, when applicable.  
Cisco TAC Web Site  
The Cisco TAC Web Site allows you to resolve P3 and P4 issues yourself, saving  
both cost and time. The site provides around-the-clock access to online tools,  
knowledge bases, and software. To access the Cisco TAC Web Site, go to the  
following URL:  
All customers, partners, and resellers who have a valid Cisco services contract  
have complete access to the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC Web  
Site. The Cisco TAC Web Site requires a Cisco.com login ID and password. If you  
have a valid service contract but do not have a login ID or password, go to the  
following URL to register:  
If you cannot resolve your technical issues by using the Cisco TAC Web Site, and  
you are a Cisco.com registered user, you can open a case online by using the TAC  
Case Open tool at the following URL:  
If you have Internet access, it is recommended that you open P3 and P4 cases  
through the Cisco TAC Web Site.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preface  
Obtaining Technical Assistance  
Cisco TAC Escalation Center  
The Cisco TAC Escalation Center addresses issues that are classified as priority  
level 1 or priority level 2; these classifications are assigned when severe network  
degradation significantly impacts business operations. When you contact the TAC  
Escalation Center with a P1 or P2 problem, a Cisco TAC engineer will  
automatically open a case.  
To obtain a directory of toll-free Cisco TAC telephone numbers for your country,  
go to the following URL:  
Before calling, please check with your network operations center to determine the  
level of Cisco support services to which your company is entitled; for example,  
SMARTnet, SMARTnet Onsite, or Network Supported Accounts (NSA). In  
addition, please have available your service agreement number and your product  
serial number.  
The Cisco TAC Escalation Center addresses issues that are classified as priority  
level 1 or priority level 2; these classifications are assigned when severe network  
degradation significantly impacts business operations. When you contact the TAC  
Escalation Center with a P1 or P2 problem, a Cisco TAC engineer will  
automatically open a case.  
To obtain a directory of toll-free Cisco TAC telephone numbers for your country,  
go to the following URL:  
Before calling, please check with your network operations center to determine the  
level of Cisco support services to which your company is entitled; for example,  
SMARTnet, SMARTnet Onsite, or Network Supported Accounts (NSA). In  
addition, please have available your service agreement number and your product  
serial number.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preface  
Obtaining Technical Assistance  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
xviii  
C H A P T E R  
1
Getting Started with the Wireless LAN  
The following topics provide an overview of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
(WLSE) and assistance in getting started:  
Overview of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine, page 1-1  
Date and Time Display on the WLSE, page 1-2  
Getting Started, page 1-3  
Logging Out, page 1-4  
Overview of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
The WLSE is a hardware and software solution for managing Cisco wireless  
devices. The WLSE has the following major features:  
Configuration  
Allows you to apply a set of configuration changes to a group of access points  
and connected switch ports.  
Reporting  
Allows you to display reports for tracking device, client and security  
information. Reports can be emailed, printed, or exported.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1 Getting Started with the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Date and Time Display on the WLSE  
Fault and Policy Monitoring  
Provides device monitoring for fault and performance conditions, monitoring  
of LEAP server responses, and monitoring of policy misconfigurations.  
The WLSE works by gathering fault, performance, and configuration information  
about the Cisco wireless devices that it discovers in your network. The WLSE  
allows you to manage the discovered devices. You can customize configuration  
templates and apply them, display reports on managed devices and wireless  
clients, and monitor device faults.  
When you log in to the WLSE, a dashboard appears with the following tabs:  
Tab  
Allows you to ...  
See...  
Faults  
Display device faults, specify fault thresholds, Fault Monitoring, page 2-1.  
specify policies, and enable syslog and traps.  
Configure  
Create and apply configuration templates and  
manage jobs.  
Configuring Devices,  
page 3-1.  
Reports  
Run, view and email reports.  
Using Reports, page 4-1.  
Administration  
Perform administrative tasks such as  
discovering devices, managing user profiles,  
and managing the appliance.  
Performing Administrative  
Tasks, page 5-1.  
Date and Time Display on the WLSE  
The WLSE uses browser (client) time in most of its displays. The format of  
timestamps depends on the browser you are using:  
In Internet Explorer, the timestamp is date, tim (hours:minutes:seconds),  
timezone, and year; for example:  
Mon Mar 25 13:29:21 PST 2002  
In Netscape Navigator, the timestamp is date, time (hours:minutes:seconds),  
offset from GMT/UTC, timezone, and year; for example:  
Mon Mar 25 13:29:21 GMT-0800 (Pacific Standard Time) 2002  
In some WLSE tables, the timestamp is hours:minutes:seconds month/day/year;  
for example, 19:23:44 06/29/2002. The time is browser (client) time.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 1 Getting Started with the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Getting Started  
The WLSE’s system time is Universal Coordinated Time (UTC), and UTC is used  
in certain displays, such as the Discovery Run Log. To display or reset the system  
time, see the instructions in the Hardware Installation and Configuration Guide  
for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine.  
Getting Started  
Before you can use WLSE monitoring, configuration, and reporting, you must set  
up your devices, initiate discovery, and move devices into the managed state. To  
get started, follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide or use the following  
task list.  
Task  
Description and References  
1. Set up devices (access points,  
bridges, routers, switches, and LEAP  
servers).  
See Set Up Devices, page 5-4 for details.  
2. Log in to the WLSE using a Web Enter the WLSE’s IP address, followed by:1741; for  
browser.  
example, http://209.165.202.128:1741.  
3. Enter device credentials.  
Device community strings must be entered on the  
WLSE. See Setting Device Credentials, page 5-17.  
For access point configuration tasks, the HTTP  
username and password must be entered on the WLSE.  
page 5-20.  
4. Initiate discovery from the WLSE If you are using discovery from the WLSE, add seed  
or import devices from a file or from devices and enable discovery. You can initiate an  
CiscoWorks.  
immediate one-time discovery or schedule discovery for  
a later time. See Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2.  
5. Verify the discovery.  
On the WLSE, verify that devices were discovered. See  
View Discovery History and Status, page 5-12.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1 Getting Started with the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Logging Out  
Task  
Description and References  
6. Set device state to “managed” and You must move devices to the managed state on the  
run inventory polling.  
WLSE before you can use configuration, reporting, and  
monitoring features. After moving devices to the  
managed state, you should perform an immediate  
inventory polling to obtain device information needed to  
use such WLSE features as reports and automatic  
grouping. See Using Discovery and Managing Devices,  
page 5-2.  
7. Create other users and user roles as The WLSE has one predefined user (the system  
needed.  
administrator) and four predefined user roles. User roles  
are used to specify the WLSE functions a given user can  
have access to. To allow other users access to the WLSE,  
the system administrator must add users. The system  
administrator can also create roles to customize user  
access. SeeAdministering Users, page 5-60.  
Logging Out  
To log out from the WLSE, click Logout in the upper right corner of the window.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C H A P T E R  
2
Fault Monitoring  
The Faults tab displays information to help you monitor your devices. All the  
device information shown under this tab is polled from the devices in your  
network.  
Following are the subtabs under Faults:  
Note  
Some of the subtabs may not be visible to some users.  
Display Faults—See Displaying Faults, page 2-1  
Specify Fault Thresholds—See Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7  
Specify Policies—See Specifying Policies, page 2-13  
Fault Forwarding—See Forwarding Faults, page 2-15  
Displaying Faults  
This window displays device fault information. A fault is an abnormal condition  
that occurs when a system component exceeds a performance threshold or is not  
functioning properly. (See Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7 to set threshold  
levels.)  
A fault can also occur when a system policy is violated. (See Specifying Policies,  
page 2-13 to set policies.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Displaying Faults  
Displayed fault information is retained by default for 30 days. To change the  
default, see Managing System Parameters, page 5-58.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Faults > Display Faults. The Fault window appears.  
Use the Filter: bar to display the faults you want to view:  
Table 2-1 Display Faults Filter Bar  
Field  
Description  
Devices  
From the list, select the device type  
whose fault summary you want to  
display.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Displaying Faults  
Table 2-1 Display Faults Filter Bar (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Severity  
From the list, select the severity from  
P1, which is the highest severity level  
to P5, which is the lowest severity  
level, to display:  
P1—Severity P1 faults.  
P1-P2—Severity P1 and P2 faults.  
P1-P3—Severity P1 through P3  
faults.  
P1-P4—Severity P1 through P4  
faults.  
P1-P5—Severity P1 through P5  
faults.  
All—Severity P1 through P5  
faults, and faults that have been  
cleared.  
State  
From the list, select a states to display:  
All—Faults in all states are  
displayed.  
Active—Faults are active (current)  
and have not been acknowledged.  
Acknowledged—Faults that are  
active and have been  
acknowledged.  
Cleared—Faults that have been  
cleared (no longer in an Active or  
Acknowledged state).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
2-3  
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Displaying Faults  
Step 3  
Click Apply. The following table appears:  
Note  
If no data is displayed in the table, there are no faults for your filtering  
selection to report.  
Ta b l e 2 - 2 D i s p l ay Fa ul t s Ta b le  
Column  
Description  
IP Address  
The device IP address.  
Click to see the device’s summary  
report. For:  
Access Points— see Displaying an  
AP Summary Report, page 4-11.  
Switches— see Displaying a  
Switch Summary Report,  
page 4-17.  
Routers— see Displaying a Router  
Hostname  
The device for which the fault is  
reported.  
Click to see the device’s summary  
report. For:  
Access Points— see Displaying an  
AP Summary Report, page 4-11.  
Switches— see Displaying a  
Switch Summary Report,  
page 4-17.  
Routers— see Displaying a Router  
Summary Report, page 4-19.  
Family  
Product  
Type  
The product family.  
The product name.  
The device or the sub-device  
component.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Displaying Faults  
Ta b l e 2 - 2 D i s p l ay Fa ul t s Ta b le (continued)  
Column  
Description  
Description  
A description of the fault.  
Click to see fault details. See Viewing  
Severity  
State  
The fault severity level.  
The operational state of the device.  
Timestamp  
Indicates the time, based on the client  
browser, that the state of the device last  
changed. See Date and Time Display  
on the WLSE, page 1-2.  
Click to see fault details. See Viewing  
Fault Details, page 2-6.  
Step 4  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
Step 5  
Step 6  
To acknowledge (change the state from Active to Acknowledged):  
A single fault, check it, then click Acknowledge.  
All faults, click Select All, then click Acknowledge.  
To unacknowledge (change the state from Acknowledged to Active):  
All faults, click Select All, then click Unacknowledged.  
Related Topics  
Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7  
Specifying Policies, page 2-13  
Forwarding Faults, page 2-15  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
2-5  
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Displaying Faults  
Viewing Fault Details  
The following tables are displayed in the Fault Details window.  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
Fault details for  
Column  
IP  
Description  
The device IP address.  
The device hostname.  
The device family.  
The product name.  
Name  
Family  
Product  
Type  
The device or the device sub-entity  
(which could include a logical entity,  
such as software or a service) in which  
the fault is found.  
Note  
If the Type is a sub-entity,  
additional columns appear  
with keys and values to help  
identify the precise  
sub-entity. These additional  
keys and values are MIB  
variables.  
Conditions  
Column  
Name  
Description  
The fault condition.  
The state of the device.  
The fault severity level.  
State  
Severity  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Specifying Fault Thresholds  
Column  
Description  
Description  
Timestamp  
A description of the fault.  
Indicates the time, based on the client  
browser, that the state of the device last  
changed.  
See Date and Time Display on the  
WLSE, page 1-2.  
Fault History  
Column  
Description  
State  
The state of the device.  
The fault severity level.  
A description of the state change.  
Severity  
Description  
Change  
Timestamp  
Indicates the time, based on the client  
browser, that the state of the device last  
changed.  
See Date and Time Display on the  
WLSE, page 1-2.  
By  
Displays the username of the person  
who changed the fault state.  
If the fault state has not been  
acknowledged, nothing is displayed in  
this column.  
Specifying Fault Thresholds  
This window allows you to set polling and exception threshold values collected  
from the devices you are monitoring.  
The threshold values you set in this window will determine how the faults are  
displayed in the Faults > Display Faults subtab.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Specifying Fault Thresholds  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
The Specify Fault Threshold window has the following options:  
Access Point—See Setting Access Point Fault Thresholds, page 2-8.  
Switch—See Setting Switch Fault Thresholds, page 2-10.  
LEAP—See Setting LEAP Server Response Time, page 2-12.  
Related Topics  
Displaying Faults, page 2-1  
Specifying Policies, page 2-13  
Forwarding Faults, page 2-15  
Setting Access Point Fault Thresholds  
Using this option, you can set up thresholds for access point faults. When the  
thresholds are exceeded, faults are generated and can be viewed under Faults >  
Display Faults.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Faults > Specify Fault Thresholds. The Fault threshold window appears.  
Select Access Point in the left pane and the menu expands.  
Select any of the following to set values for:  
SNMP Reachable—Go to Step 4.  
RF port status—Go to Step 4.  
RF port utilization—Go to Step 6.  
RF port packet errors—Go to Step 6.  
RF port WEP errors—Go to Step 6.  
RF port FCS errors—Go to Step 6.  
Ethernet port status—Go to Step 4.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Specifying Fault Thresholds  
Ethernet port utilization—Go to Step 6.  
Ethernet port packet errors—Go to Step 6.  
Step 4  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Description  
Enable  
Check to enable a threshold for this component.  
From the list, select the polling interval.  
Polling Interval  
Settings  
Down  
From the list, select the severity level and the  
number of polling cycles before the status is  
Down.  
Up  
From the list, select the number of polling  
cycles before the fault is cleared and the status  
is Up.  
Step 5  
Step 6  
Continue to Step 7.  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Description  
Enable  
Check to enable a threshold for this  
component.  
Polling Interval  
From the list, select the polling  
interval.  
Settings  
Overloaded  
From the list, select the severity level,  
the percentage, and the number of  
polling cycles before the status is  
Overloaded.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Specifying Fault Thresholds  
Field  
Description  
Degraded  
From the list, select the severity level,  
the percentage, and the number of  
polling cycles before the status is  
Degraded.  
OK  
From the list, select the severity level,  
the percentage, and the number of  
polling cycles before the status is OK.  
Step 7  
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply  
to set the new entries.  
Setting Switch Fault Thresholds  
Using this option, you can set up thresholds for switch faults. When the thresholds  
are exceeded, faults are generated and can be viewed under Faults > Display  
Faults.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Faults > Specify Fault Threshold. The Fault threshold window appears.  
Select Switch in the left pane and the menu expands.  
Select any of the following to set values for:  
SNMP Reachable —Go to Step 4.  
CPU utilization—Go to Step 6.  
Memory utilization—Go to Step 6.  
Port Status—Go to Step 4.  
Port Utilization—Go to Step 6.  
Module Status—Step 4.  
Step 4  
Complete the following:  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Specifying Fault Thresholds  
Field  
Description  
Enable  
Check to enable a threshold for this component.  
From the list, select the polling interval.  
Polling Interval  
Settings  
Down  
From the list, select the severity level and the  
number of polling cycles before the status is  
Down.  
Up  
From the list, select the number of polling  
cycles before the fault is cleared and the status  
is Up.  
Step 5  
Step 6  
Go to step Step 7.  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Description  
Enable  
Check to enable a threshold for this component.  
From the list, select the polling interval.  
Polling Interval  
Settings  
Overloaded  
From the list, select the severity level, the  
percentage, and the number of polling cycles  
before the status is Overloaded.  
Degraded  
OK  
From the list, select the severity level, the  
percentage, and the number of polling cycles  
before the status is Degraded.  
From the list, select the severity level, the  
percentage, and the number of polling cycles  
before the status is OK.  
Step 7  
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply  
to set the new entries.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Specifying Fault Thresholds  
Setting LEAP Server Response Time  
Using this option, you can set up a threshold for LEAP server response time.  
When the threshold is exceeded, a fault is generated and can be viewed under  
Faults > Display Faults.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Faults > Specify Fault Threshold. The LEAP Server:Response Time  
threshold window appears.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select LEAP in the left pane and the menu expands.  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Description  
Enable  
Check to enable a threshold for this component.  
From the list, select the polling interval.  
Polling Interval  
Settings  
Overloaded  
From the list, select the severity level, the  
response time, and the number of polling cycles  
before the status is Overloaded.  
Degraded  
OK  
From the list, select the severity level, the  
response time, and the number of polling cycles  
before the status is Degraded.  
From the list, select the severity level, the  
response time, and the number of polling cycles  
before the status is OK.  
Step 4  
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply  
to set the new entries.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Specifying Policies  
Specifying Policies  
This is window allows you to activate or deactivate a set of pre-defined policies  
for access points.  
The policies you set in this window will determine how some of the faults are  
displayed in the Faults > Display Faults subtab.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Faults > Specify Policies. The Access Point window appears.  
In the left pane, select the variable for which you want to set a policy.  
SSID—Go to Step 3  
Broadcast SSID Disabled—Go to Step 6  
WEP Enabled—Go to Step 6  
LEAP Enabled—Go to Step 6  
WEP Key Length—Go to Step 8  
HTTP Disabled—Go to Step 6  
Telnet Disabled—Go to Step 6  
User Manager Enforced—Go to Step 6  
HTTP Authentication—Go to Step 6  
Step 3  
To activate the policy, do the following:  
Field  
Description  
Verify  
Check if you want to verify that SSID is  
enabled.  
Polling Interval  
From the list, select the polling interval.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Specifying Policies  
Field  
Description  
Severity  
From the list, select a severity level to associate  
with this policy.  
Enter ssid  
Enter the unique identifier used by client  
devices to associate with the access point. Any  
alphanumeric character up to 32 characters  
long.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Step 6  
Click Add to add the SSID to the list, then go to Step 9.  
To remove an SSID from the list, select it, click Remove, then go to Step 9.  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Description  
Verify  
Check if you want to verify one of the  
following:  
Broadcast SSID is disabled  
WEP is enabled  
LEAP is enabled  
HTTP is disabled  
Telnet is disabled  
User Manager Capabilities are enforced  
HTTP authentication  
Polling Interval  
Severity  
From the list, select the polling interval.  
From the list, select a severity level to associate  
with this policy.  
Step 7  
Go to Step 9.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Forwarding Faults  
Step 8  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Description  
Verify  
Check if you want to verify the WEP key length.  
From the list, select the polling interval.  
Polling Interval  
Severity  
From the list, select a severity level to associate  
with this policy.  
WEP Key Length  
Select to indicate the bit length.  
Step 9  
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply  
to set the new entries.  
Related Topics  
Displaying Faults, page 2-1  
Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7  
Forwarding Faults, page 2-15  
Forwarding Faults  
This window allows you to set SNMP traps to enable north-bound exception  
notification to specified hosts, issue syslog messages to selected syslog servers,  
and send exception notification email to selected users.  
This section has the following options:  
Setting Trap Notification  
Setting Syslog Notification  
Emailing Faults  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Forwarding Faults  
Related Topics  
Displaying Faults, page 2-1  
Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7  
Specifying Policies, page 2-13  
Setting Trap Notification  
This option allows you to enable the WLSE to send north-bound exception  
notification to one or more SNMP trap receivers. The exception notification  
contains information such as device name and IP, fault number, timestamp,  
exception severity, and a message describing the problem.  
Before You Begin  
Make sure your SNMP trap receiver’s trap receiving daemon is set to the correct  
port. The default port is set to 162.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Faults > Fault Forwarding. The Fault Forwarding dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Trap  
Port  
Description  
Check to enable trap notification.  
Enter the port number if different from the  
default of 162.  
Host  
Enter the hostname/IP of the SNMP trap  
receiver to which you want to send SNMP trap  
notification.  
Community  
Enter the community string.  
Step 3  
If you want a different host to receive trap notification, click add row. There is no  
limit to the number you can enter.  
To delete a row, click delete, next to the row you want to remove.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Forwarding Faults  
Step 4  
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply  
to save your settings.  
Related Topics  
Setting Syslog Notification, page 2-17  
Emailing Faults, page 2-18  
Setting Syslog Notification  
This option allows you to send syslog messages to selected syslog servers. The  
messages contain information such as device name and IP, fault number, date and  
time, exception severity, and a message about what is wrong.  
Before You Begin  
Make sure your syslog server is turned on to be able to receive messages from the  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine. Also make sure that the receiving process is  
configured to receive messages from remote hosts (for example, start syslogd with  
-r option on some unix versions).  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Faults > Fault Forwarding. The Fault Forwarding dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Description  
Syslog  
Check to send syslog messages to designated  
syslog servers.  
Enter Syslog host names  
Enter the hostname/IP for the syslog servers.  
Names must be separated by a space, a comma,  
a semicolon, or a new line.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Forwarding Faults  
Step 3  
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply  
to save your settings.  
Related Topics  
Setting Trap Notification, page 2-16  
Emailing Faults, page 2-18  
Emailing Faults  
The emailed exception notification contains information such as device name and  
IP, fault number, exception severity, and a message about what is wrong  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Faults > Fault Forwarding. The Fault Forwarding dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Field  
Description  
Email  
Check to enable email notification of exception  
information.  
Enter email addresses  
Enter the email addresses of users you want to  
receive exception notification.  
Addresses must be separated by a space, a  
comma, a semicolon, or a new line.  
Priority  
From the list, select the priority of the  
exceptions you want these uses to receive.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Forwarding Faults  
Step 3  
Step 4  
If you want a different group of users to receive different priority level exceptions,  
click add row to add another set of email addresses. There is no limit to the  
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply  
to save your settings.  
Related Topics  
Setting Trap Notification, page 2-16  
Setting Syslog Notification, page 2-17  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
2-19  
Chapter 2 Fault Monitoring  
Forwarding Faults  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
2-20  
C H A P T E R  
3
Configuring Devices  
The Configure tab allows you to view, create, copy, edit, and delete configuration  
templates and apply them to large numbers of devices at a time.It also allows you  
to schedule a configuration job and to check on the job’s status.  
Following are the subtabs under Configure:  
Note  
Some of the subtabs may not be visible to some users.  
Templates—See Using the Templates, page 3-1.  
Jobs—See Managing Configuration Jobs, page 3-92.  
Using the Templates  
This is window allows you to create, modify, and delete configuration templates.  
The topics covered in this section are:  
Creating a Template, page 3-90  
Copying a Template, page 3-91  
Editing a Template, page 3-91  
Deleting a Template, page 3-92  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
3-1  
         
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Related Topic  
Managing Configuration Jobs, page 3-92  
Template Choices  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any entries  
you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
When you create or edit a configuration template, the following choices appear in  
the left pane of the Templates window:  
1. Template Name—See Naming the Template, page 3-3.  
2. Template Categories  
Note  
Any or all of the template categories can be completed in any order.  
Express Template—See Using Express Template, page 3-3.  
Association—See Setting Up Association, page 3-7.  
Ethernet—See Configuring the Ethernet Port, page 3-31.  
Radio—See Configuring the Radio, page 3-36.  
Security—See Defining the Security Settings, page 3-51.  
Services—See Configuring Services, page 3-60.  
Events—See Configuring Events, page 3-79.  
Custom Values—See Configuring Custom Values, page 3-85.  
3. Preview—See Previewing the Template, page 3-89.  
4. Finish—See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Naming the Template  
This option enables to you to name the template.  
Procedure  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the entries you have made.  
Step 1  
Select Template Name. The Template Name dialog box appears:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Enter a name for the template.  
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Description  
Enter a description of the purpose of the  
template.  
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1  
Step 2  
Select a template category. (For additional information, see Template Categories,  
page 3-2.)  
Using Express Template  
Use this option if you need to set up an access point quickly with a simple  
configuration. This will allow you to enter all the access point's essential settings  
for basic operation.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Express Template. The Express dialog box displays in the right pane:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-1 Express Tem plate Settings  
Field  
Description  
Configuration Server Protocol  
Set this entry to match the network’s method  
of IP address assignment.  
From the list, select one of the following  
options:  
None-Static IP—Use this if your  
network does not have an automatic  
system for IP address assignment.  
BOOTP—Use this if your network uses  
Bootstrap Protocol, in which IP  
addresses are hard-coded based on MAC  
addresses.  
DHCP—Use this if your network uses  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol,  
in which IP addresses are “leased” for  
predetermined periods of time.  
Default Subnet Mask  
Enter an IP subnet mask to identify the  
subnetwork so the IP address can be  
recognized on the LAN.  
If DHCP or BOOTP is not enabled, this field  
is the subnet mask.  
If DHCP or BOOTP is enabled, this field  
provides the subnet mask only if no server  
responds to the access point's DHCP or  
BOOTP request.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-1 Express Tem plate Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Default Gateway  
Enter the IP address of your default Internet  
gateway.  
The entry 255.255.255.255 indicates no  
gateway.  
Radio Service Set ID (SSID)  
Enter a unique identifier client devices use to  
associate with the access point. It can be any  
alphanumeric, case-sensitive string, from 2  
to 32 characters long.  
Several access points on a network or  
sub-network can share an SSID.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-1 Express Tem plate Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Role in Network  
Access Point—Use this setting if the  
access point is connected to the wired  
LAN.  
Repeater—Use this setting for access  
points not connected to the wired LAN.  
Survey Client—Use this setting when  
performing a site survey for a repeater  
access point. When you select this  
setting, clients are not allowed to  
associate and the bridge's STP function  
is disabled.  
Root Bridge—Use this setting to set a  
bridge as the root bridge. (One bridge in  
each group of bridges must be set as the  
root bridge). The root bridge cannot  
associate with another root bridge.  
Non-Root Bridge w/ Client—Use this  
setting for non-root bridges that accept  
associations from client devices and for  
bridges acting as repeaters. A non-root  
bridge will only associate to another  
bridge (root or non-root).  
Non-Root Bridge w/o Client—Use this  
setting for non-root bridges that should  
not accept associations from client  
devices. A non-root bridge (without  
clients) can connect to a wired LAN and  
only associates to another bridge (root or  
non-root).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-1 Express Tem plate Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Ensure Compatibility with Cisco From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable—Use this setting to  
automatically configure the device to be  
compatible with other Cisco devices on  
your wireless LAN.  
Disable—Use this setting to not  
automatically configure the device to be  
compatible with other Cisco devices on  
your wireless LAN.  
Ensure Compatibility with  
2MB/sec Clients  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable— Use this setting to operate at a  
maximum speed of two megabits per  
second.  
Disable—Use this setting if you do not  
speed of two megabits per second.  
Step 2  
Select one of the following:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Setting Up Association  
Use this option to set up spanning tree protocol (STP) on bridges and to set up  
filtering to control the flow of data through the access point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Association. The menu expands and the Association dialog box displays in  
the right pane.  
Select one of the following from the Association menu:  
Address Filters—Defining Address Filters, page 3-11.  
Ethertype Filters—Defining Ethertype Filters, page 3-12.  
IP Protocol Filters—Defining IP Protocol Filters, page 3-16.  
IP Port Filters—Defining IP Port Filters, page 3-21.  
Advanced—Defining Advanced Associations, page 3-25.  
Port Assignments—Configuring Port Assignments, page 3-30.  
Defining Spanning Tree Protocol  
This option is used for only bridges.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Association > Spanning Tree. The Association: Spanning Tree Protocol  
dialog box appears.  
Click see details for information on which bridges this configuration is valid.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 3  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-2 Spanning Tree Protocol Settings  
Field Description  
Spanning Tree Protocol From the list, select one of the following:  
(STP)  
Enable—Use this setting to enable STP on the  
bridge.  
Disable—If you do not want STP enabled the  
bridge.  
Root Configuration  
Priority (0-65535)  
Enter a number to influence which bridge is  
designated the root bridge in the spanning tree.  
When bridges have the same priority setting, STP  
uses the bridges’ MAC addresses as a tiebreaker.  
The bridge with the lowest priority setting is likely  
to be designated the root bridge in the tree.  
Max Age (6-40 Seconds) Enter the number of seconds to define how long the  
bridge waits before deciding the network has  
changed and the spanning tree needs to be rebuilt.  
For example, with Max Age set to 20, the bridge  
attempts to rebuild the spanning tree if it does not  
receive a hello BDPU from the root bridge in the  
spanning tree within 20 seconds.  
Hello Time (1-10  
Seconds)  
Enter the number of seconds to define how often the  
root bridge in the spanning tree sends out a hello  
BPDU telling the other bridges that the network  
topology has not changed and that the spanning tree  
should remain the same.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-2 Spanning Tree Protocol Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Forward Delay (4-30  
Seconds)  
Enter the number of seconds to define how long the  
bridge’s ports should stay in the listening and  
learning transition states if there is a change in the  
spanning tree.  
Port Configuration  
Path Cost (1-65535)  
Enter a number to indicates the relative efficiency of  
a port’s network link.  
A port with a high path cost is less likely to become  
a bridge's root port.  
Priority (0-255)  
Enable  
Enter a number to influence whether STP designates  
a port as a bridge's root port.  
A port with a low priority setting is more likely to  
become a bridge's root port.  
From the list, select one of the following for each  
port configured:  
Enable—Use this setting to indicate whether the  
port participates in STP. (This determines  
whether the port blocks or forwards traffic.)  
port does not participate in STP.  
Step 4  
Select one of the following:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Defining Address Filters  
Using this option, you can:  
Create a MAC address filter  
Remove a MAC address filter  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Association > Address Filters. The Association: Address Filters dialog  
box appears.  
To add a new MAC address filter complete the following fields:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
New Destination  
MAC Address  
Enter a destination MAC address by entering the  
address in one of the following ways:  
With colons separating the character pairs  
(00:40:96:12:34:56, for example)  
Without any intervening characters  
(004096123456, for example)  
Allowed  
Click to pass traffic to the MAC address.  
Click to discard traffic to the MAC address.  
Disallowed  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Click Add to add the MAC address to the Current MAC Address Filters list.  
To remove a MAC Address, select it from the Current MAC Address Filters list,  
then click Remove.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 5  
Select one of the following:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Defining Ethertype Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Association > Ethertype Filters. The Association: Ethertype Filters  
dialog box appears.  
Using this option:  
Create new filters—See Creating New Ethertype Filters, page 3-12.  
Delete the Filters—See Deleting Ethertype Filters, page 3-14.  
Using this option you can also:  
Create Special Cases —See Creating Special Cases, page 3-14.  
Delete Special Cases—See Deleting Special Cases, page 3-16.  
Creating New Ethertype Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
To create and enable protocol filters for the access point’s Ethernet port, enter the  
following:  
Table 3-3 Creating New Ethertype Filters Settings  
Field  
Description  
Add New Ethertype Filter  
Set ID  
Enter an identification number for the filter set.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-3 Creating New Ethertype Filters Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Set Name  
Enter a descriptive filter set name.  
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Default Disposition  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Forward—Use this setting to forward protocol  
traffic.  
Block—Use this setting to block protocol traffic.  
Default Time to Live (msec)  
unicast  
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets  
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they are  
discarded.  
multicast  
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets  
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they are  
discarded.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Click Add. The new name is added to the Ethertype Filters list.  
Select one of the following:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Deleting Ethertype Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
To delete protocol filters for the access point's Ethernet port, select the set name  
from the Current Ethertype Filters list, then click Delete.  
Select one of the following:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Creating Special Cases  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select the default filter for which you want to define a special case.  
Enter the following:  
Table 3-4 Ethertype Filter Special Cases Settings  
Field  
Description  
Special Cases  
Ethertype  
Disposition  
Enter the Ethertype filter name.  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Default—Use the disposition you set for the Ethertype  
filter.  
Forward—Use this setting to forward protocol traffic.  
Block—Use this setting to block protocol traffic.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-4 Ethertype Filter Special Cases Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Priority  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Default—This setting is the same as best effort, which  
applies to normal LAN traffic.  
Background—Use this setting for bulk transfers and other  
activities that are allowed on the network but should not  
impact network use by other users and applications.  
Excellent Effort—Use this setting for a network’s most  
important users.  
Controlled Load—Use this setting for important business  
applications that are subject to some form of admission  
control.  
Interactive Video—Use this setting for traffic with less  
than 100 ms delay.  
Interactive Voice—Use this setting for traffic with less  
than 10 ms delay.  
Network Control—Use this setting for traffic that must get  
through to maintain and support the network infrastructure.  
Time to Live (msec)  
unicast  
multicast  
Alert  
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets should stay in  
the access point’s buffer before they are discarded.  
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets should stay  
in the access point’s buffer before they are discarded.  
From the list, select one of the following:  
yes—Use this setting to send an alert to the event log when  
a user transmits or receives the protocol through the access  
point.  
no—Use this setting to not send an alert to the event log.  
Step 3  
Click Add. The new name is added to the list box.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
3-15  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 4  
Select one of the following:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Deleting Special Cases  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
To delete special cases for the access point's Ethernet port, select the Ethertype  
Select one of the following:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Defining IP Protocol Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Association > IP Protocol Filters. The Association: IP Protocol Filters  
dialog box appears.  
With this option you can:  
Create new filters—See Creating New IP Protocol Filters, page 3-17.  
Delete the filters—See Deleting IP Protocol Filters, page 3-18.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Using this option you can also:  
Create Special Cases —See Creating Special Cases, page 3-18.  
Delete Special Cases—See Deleting Special Cases, page 3-21.  
Creating New IP Protocol Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
To create and enable IP protocol filters, enter the following:  
Field  
Description  
Add New Protocol Filter  
Set ID  
Enter an identification number for the filter set.  
Enter a descriptive filter set name.  
Set Name  
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Default Disposition  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Forward—Use this setting to forward protocol  
traffic.  
Block—Use this setting to block protocol traffic.  
Default Time to Live (msec)  
unicast  
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets  
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they are  
discarded.  
multicast  
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets  
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they are  
discarded.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Click Add. The new name is added to the Current Protocol Filters list.  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Deleting IP Protocol Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
To delete an IP protocol filter, select the name from the Current Protocol Filters  
list, then click Delete.  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Creating Special Cases  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select the default filter for which you want to define a special case.  
Enter the following:  
Table 3-5 IP Protocol Filters Special Cases Settings  
Field  
Description  
Special Cases  
Protocol  
Enter the IP protocol name.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-5 IP Protocol Filters Special Cases Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Disposition  
Default—Use the disposition you set for the protocol  
filter.  
Forward—Use this setting to forward traffic.  
Block—Use this setting to block traffic.  
Priority  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Default—This setting is the same as best effort, which  
applies to normal LAN traffic.  
Background—Use this setting for bulk transfers and  
other activities that are allowed on the network but  
should not impact network use by other users and  
applications.  
Excellent Effort—Use this setting for a network's most  
important users.  
Controlled Load—Use this setting for important  
business applications that are subject to some form of  
admission control.  
Interactive Video—Use this setting for traffic with less  
than 100 ms delay.  
Interactive Voice—Use this setting for traffic with less  
than 10 ms delay.  
Network Control—Use this setting for traffic that must  
get through to maintain and support the network  
infrastructure.  
Time to Live (msec)  
unicast  
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets should  
stay in the access point’s buffer before they are discarded.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-5 IP Protocol Filters Special Cases Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
multicast  
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets should  
stay in the access point’s buffer before they are discarded.  
Alert  
From the list, select one of the following:  
yes—Use this setting to send an alert to the event log  
when a user transmits or receives the protocol through  
the access point.  
no—Use this setting to not send an alert to the event  
log.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Click Add. The new name is added to the list box.  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Deleting Special Cases  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
To delete special cases, select the protocol name from the list box, then click  
Delete.  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Defining IP Port Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Association > IP Port Filters. The Association: IP Port Filters dialog box  
appears.  
With this option you can:  
Create new filters—See Creating New Port Filters, page 3-22.  
Delete the filters—See Deleting Port Filters, page 3-23.  
Using this option you can also:  
Create Special Cases —See Creating Special Cases, page 3-23.  
Delete Special Cases—See Deleting Special Cases, page 3-25.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Creating New Port Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
To create and enable port filters, enter the following:  
Field  
Description  
Add New Protocol Filter  
Set ID  
Enter an identification number for the filter set.  
Enter a descriptive filter set name.  
Set Name  
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Default Disposition  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Forward—Use this setting to forward traffic.  
Block—Use this setting to block traffic.  
Default Time to Live (msec)  
unicast  
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets  
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they  
are discarded.  
multicast  
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets  
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they  
are discarded.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Click Add. The new name is added to the Current Port Filters list.  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Deleting Port Filters  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
To delete a protocol filter, select the name from the Current Port Filters list, then  
click Delete.  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Creating Special Cases  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select the default filter for which you want to define a special case.  
Enter the following:  
Table 3-6  
IP Port Filters Special Cases Settings  
Field  
Description  
Special Cases  
Port  
Enter the IP Port filter name.  
Disposition  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Default—Use the disposition you set for the port filter.  
Forward—Use this setting to forward protocol traffic.  
Block—Use this setting to block protocol traffic.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
3-23  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-6  
IP Port Filters Special Cases Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Priority  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Default—This setting is the same as best effort, which  
applies to normal LAN traffic.  
Background—Use this setting for bulk transfers and  
other activities that are allowed on the network but  
should not impact network use by other users and  
applications.  
Excellent Effort—Use this setting for a network's most  
important users.  
Controlled Load—Use this setting for important  
business applications that are subject to some form of  
admission control.  
Interactive Video—Use this setting for traffic with less  
than 100 ms delay.  
Interactive Voice—Use this setting for traffic with less  
than 10 ms delay.  
Network Control—Use this setting for traffic that must  
get through to maintain and support the network  
infrastructure.  
Time to Live (msec)  
unicast  
multicast  
Alert  
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets should stay  
in the buffer before they are discarded.  
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets should  
stay in the buffer before they are discarded.  
From the list, select one of the following:  
yes—Use this setting to send an alert to the event log  
when a user transmits or receives the protocol through  
the access point.  
no—Use this setting to not send an alert to the event log.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Deleting Special Cases  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
To delete special cases, select the port name from the list box, then click Delete.  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Defining Advanced Associations  
Use this option to control the total number of devices an access point can list in  
the Association Table and the amount of time the access point continues to track  
each device class when a device is inactive.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Association > Advanced. The Association: Advanced dialog box appears.  
To define advanced associations, enter the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-7 Advanced Association Settings  
Field  
Description  
Alert Severity Level  
From the list select one of the following:  
systemFatal—Indicates an event that prevents  
operation of the port or device.  
protocolFatal—Indicates an event that prevents  
operation of the port or device  
portFatal—Indicates an event that prevents  
operation of the port or device  
systemAlert—Indicates that you need to take  
action to correct the condition.  
protocolAlert—Indicates that you need to take  
action to correct the condition.  
portAlert—Indicates that you need to take  
action to correct the condition.  
externalAlert—Indicates that you need to take  
action to correct the condition.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-7 Advanced Association Settings (continued)  
Field Description  
systemWarning—Indicates that an error or  
failure may have occurred.  
protocolWarning—Indicates that an error or  
failure may have occurred.  
portWarning—Indicates that an error or failure  
may have occurred.  
externalWarning—Indicates that an error or  
failure may have occurred.  
systemInfo—Notification that some sort of  
event has occurred.  
protocolInfo—Notification that some sort of  
event has ocurred.  
portInfo—Notification that some sort of event  
has ocurred.  
externalInfo—Notification that some sort of  
event has ocurred.  
Max Bytes Stored Per Enter the maximum number of bytes the access point  
Alert Packet  
stores for each Station Alert packet when packet  
tracing is enabled.  
If you use 0, the access point does not store bytes for  
Station Alert packets; it only logs the event.  
Max Fwd Table Entries From the list, select one of the following to  
designate the maximum number of devices that can  
appear in the Association Table:  
1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768, 65536.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-7 Advanced Association Settings (continued)  
Field Description  
Enable Extended Stats From the list, select one of the following:  
in MIB  
Enable—Use this setting to enable the storage  
of detailed statistics in the device’s memory.  
Disable—Use this setting to disable the storage  
of detailed statistics in the device’s memory.  
When you disable extended statistics you  
conserve memory, and the device can include  
more devices in the Association Table.  
Enable PSPF  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable—Use this setting to enable Publicly  
Secure Packet Forwarding, which ensures that  
client devices cannot communicate with other  
client devices on the wireless network. This  
feature is useful for public wireless networks  
like those installed in airports or on college  
campuses.  
Disable—Use this setting to disable Publicly  
Secure Packet Forwarding.  
Click see detail to see for which versions this setting  
is valid.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-7 Advanced Association Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Unknown Class  
Timeout  
Enter the number of seconds the access point  
continues to track an inactive device depending on  
its class.  
Multicast Addresses  
Timeout  
A setting of zero tells the access point to track a  
device indefinitely no matter how long it is inactive.  
Infrastructure Hosts  
Timeout  
A setting of 300 equals 5 minutes; 1800 equals 30  
minutes; 28800 equals 8 hours.  
Client Stations  
Timeout  
Repeaters Timeout  
Access Points Timeout  
Across Bridge Hosts  
Timeout  
Non-Root Bridges  
Timeout  
Root Bridges Timeout  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring Port Assignments  
When you assign specific ports, your network topology remains constant even  
when devices reboot.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Association > Port Assignments. The Association: Port Assignments  
dialog box appears.  
To define port assignments, enter the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
ifIndex  
Lists the port’s designator in the Standard MIB-II  
(RFC1213-MIB.my) interface index.  
dot1dBasePort  
AID  
Lists the port’s designator in the Bridge MIB (RFC1493;  
BRIDGE-MIB.my) interface index.  
Lists the port’s 802.11 radio drivers association  
Station  
Enter the MAC address of the device to which you want  
to assign the port.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring the Ethernet Port  
Use this option to configure the device’s Ethernet port.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Ethernet. The menu expands and the Ethernet dialog box displays in the  
right pane.  
Select one of the following from the Ethernet menu:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Identification—See Identifying the Ethernet Port, page 3-31.  
Filters—See Setting Up Ethernet Filters, page 3-32.  
Advanced—See Defining the Ethernet Advanced Settings, page 3-34.  
Identifying the Ethernet Port  
Use this option to define basic identity information for the Ethernet port.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Ethernet > Identification. The Ethernet: Identification dialog box  
displays in the right pane.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 2  
Enter the following information to identify the port:  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Primary Port?  
yes—Sets the Ethernet port as the  
primary port.  
no—Sets the radio port as the primary  
port.  
Adopt Primary Port Identity?  
From the list, select one of the following:  
yes—This adopts the primary port  
settings (MAC and IP addresses) for the  
Ethernet port.  
addresses for the Ethernet port.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Setting Up Ethernet Filters  
Use this option to define filters for the Ethernet port, the IP Protocol, and the IP  
Port.  
Note  
Changing this setting may cause the access point to reboot.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Ethernet > Filters. The Ethernet: Filters dialog box displays in the right  
pane.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Ethertype  
Receive  
Enter the ID of a defined Ethertype filter, or select one of the  
filters you created using Association > Ethertype Filters.  
Transmit  
Enter the ID of a defined Ethertype filter, or select one of the  
filters you created using Association > Ethertype Filters.  
IP Protocol  
Receive  
Enter the ID of a defined IP protocol filter, or select one of  
the filters you created using Association > IP Protocol  
Filters.  
Transmit  
Enter the ID of a defined IP protocol filter, or select one of  
the filters you created using Association > IP Protocol  
Filters.  
IP Port  
Receive  
Enter the ID of a defined IP port filter, or select one of the  
filters you created using Association > IP Port Filters.  
Transmit  
Enter the ID of a defined IP port filter, or select one of the  
filters you created using Association > IP Port Filters.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Defining the Ethernet Advanced Settings  
Use this option to define the settings and operational status of the Ethernet port.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Ethernet > Advanced. The Ethernet: Advanced dialog box displays in the  
right pane.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-8 Ethernet Advanced Settings  
Field  
Description  
Status  
From the list, select one of the following:  
up— Enables the Ethernet port for normal operation.  
down—Disables the device’s Ethernet port.  
Packet Forwarding  
From the list, select one of the following:  
enabled—Allows normal operation.  
disabled—Prevents data from moving between the  
Ethernet and the radio, which is useful in  
troubleshooting.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-8 Ethernet Advanced Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Default Multicast  
Address Filter  
allowed—The access point forwards all traffic  
except packets sent to the MAC addresses set as  
disallowed under Association > Address Filters.  
disallowed—The access point discards all traffic  
except packets sent to the MAC addresses set as  
allowed under Association > Address Filters.  
Maximum Multicast Use this setting to control the number of multicast  
Packets/Second  
packets that can pass through the Ethernet port each  
second.  
If you enter 0, the access point passes an unlimited  
number of multicast packets.  
If you enter a number other than 0, the device passes only  
that number of multicast packets per second.  
Default Unicast  
Address Filter  
From the list, select one of the following:  
allowed—The access point forwards all traffic  
except packets sent to MAC addresses that have  
been set as disallowed under Association > Address  
Filters.  
disallowed—The access point discards all traffic  
except packets sent to the MAC addresses that have  
been set as allowed under Association > Address  
Filters.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring the Radio  
Use this option to configure the device’s radio.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Radio. The menu expands and the Radio dialog box displays in the right  
pane.  
Select one of the following from the Radio menu:  
Note  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Identification—See Identifying the Radio Port, page 3-36.  
Filters—See Setting Up Radio Filters, page 3-38.  
Hardware—See Defining the Radio Hardware Settings, page 3-39.  
Advanced—See Defining the Radio Advanced Settings, page 3-44.  
Searched Channels—See Defining the Radio Searched Channels Settings,  
page 3-49.  
Identifying the Radio Port  
Use this option to define basic identity information for the Ethernet port.  
Note  
Changing this setting may cause the access point to reboot.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Radio > Identification. The Radio: Identification dialog box displays in  
the right pane.  
Enter the following information to identify the port:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Primary Port?  
From the list, select one of the following:  
yes—Sets the radio port as the primary  
port.  
no—Sets the Ethernet port as the  
primary port.  
Adopt Primary Port Identity?  
From the list, select one of the following:  
yes—This adopts the primary port  
settings (MAC and IP addresses) for the  
Ethernet port.  
addresses for the Ethernet port.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Setting Up Radio Filters  
Note  
Changing this setting may cause the access point to reboot.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Radio > Filters. The Radio Filters dialog box displays in the right pane.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-9 Radio Filters Settings  
Field  
Description  
Ethertype  
Receive  
Enter the ID of a defined Ethertype filter, or  
select one of the filters you created using  
Association > Ethertype Filters.  
Transmit  
Enter the ID of a defined Ethertype filter, or  
select one of the filters you created using  
Association > Ethertype Filters.  
IP Protocol  
Receive  
Enter the ID of a defined IP protocol filter, or  
select one of the filters you created using  
Association > IP Protocol Filters.  
Transmit  
Enter the ID of a defined IP protocol filter, or  
select one of the filters you created using  
Association > IP Protocol Filters.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-9 Radio Filters Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
IP Port  
Receive  
Enter the ID of a defined IP port protocol  
filter, or select one of the filters you created  
using Association > IP Port Filters.  
Transmit  
Enter the ID of a defined IP port protocol  
using Association > IP Port Filters.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Defining the Radio Hardware Settings  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Radio > Hardware. The Radio: Hardware dialog box displays in the right  
pane.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-10 Radio Hardware Settings  
Field  
Description  
Service SetID (SSID)  
Enter a unique identifier client devices use to  
associate with the access point. It can be any  
alphanumeric, case-sensitive string, from 2  
to 32 characters long.  
Several access points on a network or  
sub-network can share an SSID.  
Allow “Broadcast” SSID to  
Associate  
From the list, select one of the following:  
yes—Allows devices that do not specify  
an SSID (devices that are “broadcasting”  
in search of an access point to associate  
with) to associate with the access point.  
no—Does not allow devices that do not  
specify an SSID (devices that are  
“broadcasting” in search of an access  
point to associate with) to associate with  
the access point.  
With no selected, the SSID used by the  
client device must match exactly the  
access point’s SSID.  
Enable “World Mode”  
From the list, select one of the following:  
multi-domain operation?  
yes—Allows the access point to add  
channel carrier set information to its  
beacon.  
Client devices with world-mode enabled  
receive the carrier set information and  
adjust their settings automatically.  
no—Does not allow the access point to  
add channel carrier set information to its  
beacon.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-10 Radio Hardware Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Data Rates (Mb/sec)  
1.0  
From the list, select one of the following for  
each of the four rates in megabits per second:  
2.0  
basic—Allows transmission at this rate  
for all packets, both unicast and  
multicast. At least one data rate must be  
set to basic.  
5.5  
11.0  
yes—Allows transmission at this rate for  
unicast packets only.  
no—Does not allow transmission at this  
rate.  
Transmit Power  
From the list, select one of the following  
milliwatt settings: 1, 5, 20, 30, 50, 100.  
To reduce interference or to conserve power,  
select a lower power setting.  
Fragmentation Threshold  
(256-2338)  
Enter a setting to determine the size at which  
packets are fragmented (sent as several  
pieces instead of as one block).  
Use a low setting in areas where  
communication is poor or where there is a  
great deal of radio interference.  
RTS Threshold (0-2339)  
Enter a setting to determine the packet size at  
which the access point issues a request to  
send (RTS) before sending the packet.  
A low RTS Threshold setting can be useful in  
areas where many client devices are  
associating with the access point, or in areas  
where the clients are far apart and can detect  
only the access point and not each other.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-10 Radio Hardware Settings (continued)  
Field Description  
Maximum RTS Retries (1-128) Enter the maximum number of times the  
access point issues an RTS before stopping  
the attempt to send the packet through the  
radio.  
Max. Data Retires (1-128)  
Beacon Period (Kusec)  
Data Beacon Rate (DTIM)  
Enter the maximum number of attempts the  
access point makes to send a packet before  
giving up and dropping the packet.  
Enter the amount of time between beacons in  
Kilo microseconds. (One Kmsec equals  
1,024 microseconds.)  
Enter the amount of time, always a multiple  
of the beacon period, to determine how often  
the beacon contains a delivery traffic  
indication message (DTIM).  
The DTIM tells power-save client devices  
that a packet is waiting for them.  
If the beacon period is set at 100, its default  
setting, and the data beacon rate is set at 2, its  
default setting, then the access point sends a  
beacon containing a DTIM every 200  
Kmsecs. (One Kmsec equals 1,024  
microseconds.)  
Default Radio Channel  
From the list, select the radio channel you  
want for a default. Each channel covers 22  
MHz.  
The factory setting for Cisco wireless LAN  
systems is Radio Channel 6 transmitting at  
2437 MHz.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-10 Radio Hardware Settings (continued)  
Field Description  
Search for less-congested Radio From the list, select one of the following:  
Channel?  
yes—Allows the access point to scan for  
the radio channel that is least busy and  
selects that channel for use.  
no—Will not allow the access point to  
scan for a radio channel that is least  
busy.  
Receive Antenna  
Transmit Antenna  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Right—Use this setting if your access  
point has removable antennas and you  
install a high-gain antenna on the access  
point's right connector. (When you look  
at the access point's back panel, the right  
antenna is on the right.)  
Use this setting for both receive and  
transmit.  
Left—Use this setting if your access  
point has removable antennas and you  
install a high-gain antenna on the access  
point's left connector. (When you look at  
the access point's back panel, the left  
antenna is on the left.)  
Use this setting for both receive and  
transmit.  
Diversity—Use this setting if your  
access point has two fixed  
(non-removable) antennas; it tells the  
access point to use the antenna that  
receives the best signal.  
Use this setting for both receive and  
transmit.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Defining the Radio Advanced Settings  
Use this option to define the settings and operational status of the Ethernet port.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Radio > Advanced. The Radio: Advanced dialog box displays in the right  
pane.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Status  
up— Enables the Radio port for normal  
operation.  
down—Disables the device’s Radio  
port.  
Packet Forwarding  
From the list, select one of the following:  
enabled—Allows normal operation.  
disabled—Prevents data from moving  
between the Ethernet and the radio,  
which is useful in troubleshooting.  
Default Multicast Address Filter From the list, select one of the following:  
Allowed—The access point forwards all  
traffic except packets sent to the MAC  
addresses set as disallowed under  
Association > Address Filters.  
Disallowed—The access point discards  
all traffic except packets sent to the  
MAC addresses set as allowed under  
Association > Address Filters.  
Maximum Multicast  
Packets/Second  
Use this setting to control the number of  
multicast packets that can pass through the  
Ethernet port each second.  
If you enter 0, the access point passes an  
unlimited number of multicast packets.  
If you enter a number other than 0, the device  
passes only that number of multicast packets  
per second.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Maximum Number of  
Associations  
Enter the maximum number of wireless  
networking devices that are allowed to  
associate to the access point.  
If you enter 0 it means that the maximum  
possible number of associations is allowed.  
Click see details to see for which versions  
this setting is valid.  
Use Aironet Extensions  
From the list, select one of the following:  
yes—Enable load balancing, Message  
Integrity Check (MIC), and WEP key  
hashing.  
no—Does no enable the features listed  
above.  
Ethernet encapsulation  
transform  
From the list, select one of the following:  
802.1H—Provides optimum  
performance for Cisco Aironet wireless  
products.  
RFC1042—Ensures interoperability  
with non-Cisco Aironet wireless  
equipment.  
Enhanced MIC verification for  
WEP  
From the list, select one of the following:  
None—Does not enable MIC.  
NMH—Enables MIC (Message Integrity  
Check), a security feature that protects  
your WEP keys by preventing attacks on  
encrypted packets called bit-flip attacks.  
Click see details to see for which versions  
this setting is valid.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol From the list, select the following:  
None—Does not enable WEP key  
hashing.  
Cisco— Enables WEP key hashing that  
defends against an attack on WEP in  
which the intruder uses the unencrypted  
initialization vector (IV) in encrypted  
packets to calculate the WEP key.  
Click see details to see for which versions  
this setting is valid.  
Broadcast WEP Key rotation  
interval (sec)  
Enter a rotation interval in seconds.  
If you enter 900, for example, the access  
point sends a new broadcast WEP key to  
all associated client devices every 15  
minutes.  
If you enter 0, you disable broadcast  
WEP key rotation.  
Click see details to see for which versions  
this setting is valid.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Default Unicast Address Filter  
Open  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Shared  
Allowed—The access point forwards all  
traffic except packets sent to the MAC  
addresses set as disallowed with the  
Address Filters.  
Network-EAP  
Disallowed—The access point discards  
all traffic except packets sent to the  
MAC addresses set as allowed with the  
Address Filters or on your authentication  
server.  
Select Disallowed for each  
authentication type that also uses  
MAC-based authentication.  
Specified Access Point 1  
Specified Access Point 2  
Specified Access Point 3  
Specified Access Point 4  
If this access point is a repeater, enter the  
MAC address of one or more root-unit access  
points with which you want this access point  
to associate.  
With MAC addresses in these fields, the  
repeater access point always tries to  
associate with the specified access points  
instead of with other less-efficient access  
points.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Radio Modulation  
Standard—This setting is the  
modulation type specified in IEEE  
802.11, the wireless standard published  
by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standards  
Association.  
MOK—This modulation was used  
before the IEEE finished the high-speed  
802.11 standard and may still be in use in  
older wireless networks.  
Radio Preamble  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Long—Ensures compatibility between  
the access point and all early models of  
Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Adapters  
(PC4800 and PC4800A).  
Short— Cisco Aironet’s Wireless LAN  
improves throughput performance.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Defining the Radio Searched Channels Settings  
Use this option to limit the channels that the access point scans when Search for  
less-congested radio channel is enabled.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
3-49  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
The access point uses this setting to scan for the radio channel that is least busy  
and selects that channel for use.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Radio > Searched Channels. The Radio: Searched Channels dialog box  
displays in the right pane.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Channel Number  
Frequency (mHz)  
Search?  
List the available channels by number.  
Lists the channel frequency.  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Yes—Use this option to include the  
channel in the scan for less-congested  
channels.  
No—Use this option to exclude the  
channels  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Defining the Security Settings  
Use this option to configure the device’s security settings.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Security. The menu expands and the Security dialog box displays in the  
right pane.  
Select one of the following from the Security menu:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Local Admin Access—See Setting Local Admin Access, page 3-51.  
Local AP/Client Security—See Setting Local AP/Client Security, page 3-52.  
Server-Based Security—See Setting Server-Based Security, page 3-55.  
Setting Local Admin Access  
Use this option to enable or disable local admin access.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Security > Local Admin Access. The Security: Local Admin Access  
dialog box appears.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 2  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Local Admin Authentication  
Select Enable to enable local admin  
authentication, or Disable to disable it.  
Allow read-only browsing  
without login  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Setting Local AP/Client Security  
Use this option to set up the local access point and client security.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Security > Local AP/Client Security. The Security: Local AP/Client  
Security dialog box appears:  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-12 Local AP / Client Security Settings  
Field Description  
Data Encryption by From the list, select the encryption type:  
Stations  
No Encryption—Requires clients to communicate  
with the Access Point without any data encryption.  
This setting is not recommended.  
Optional—Allows clients to communicate with the  
Access Point either with or without data encryption.  
Typically, this option is used when you have client  
devices that cannot make a WEP connection, such as  
non-Cisco clients in a 128-bit WEP environment.  
Full Encryption—Requires clients to use data  
encryption when communicating with the Access  
Point. Clients not using data encryption are allowed  
to communicate. This option is recommended if you  
want to maximize the security of your Wireless  
LAN.  
Authentication Type  
Open  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Yes—Allows any device, regardless of its WEP  
keys, to authenticate and attempt to associate. This  
is the recommended setting.  
No—Does not allow any device, regardless of its  
WEP keys, to authenticate and attempt to associate.  
Shared Key  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Yes—Tells the access point to send a plain-text,  
shared key query to any device attempting to  
associate with the access point. This query can leave  
the access point open to a known-text attack from  
intruders. This is not as secure as the Open setting.  
No—Does not allow the access point to send a  
plain-text, shared key query to any device  
attempting to associate with the access point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-12 Local AP / Client Security Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Network-EAP  
Yes—Allows EAP-enabled client devices to  
authenticate through the access point.  
No—Does not allow EAP-enabled client devices to  
authenticate through the access point.  
Require EAP  
Open  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Yes—Use this option if you use open and EAP  
authentication to block client devices that are not  
using EAP from authenticating through the access  
point.  
No—Use this option if you do not use open and EAP  
authentication.  
Shared  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Yes—Use this option if you use shared and EAP  
authentication to block client devices that are not  
using EAP from authenticating through the access  
point.  
No—Use this option if you do not use shared and  
EAP authentication.  
Encryption Keys 1 through 4  
Transmit Key Click to indicate this is the key you want to use to  
transmit packets. Only one key can be selected at a time.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-12 Local AP / Client Security Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Encryption Key  
Enter the type of encryption key used:  
For 40-bit WEP keys, enter as 10 hexadecimal digits  
(0-9, a-f, or A-F).  
For128-bit WEP keys, enter as 26 hexadecimal  
digits (0-9, a-f, or A-F).  
Key Size  
From the list, select one of the following:  
40 bit  
128 bit  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Setting Server-Based Security  
Use this option to set up server-based security.  
Note  
Changing this setting may cause the access point to reboot.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Security > Server-Based Security. The Security: Server-Based dialog box  
appears:  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-13 Server-Based Security Settings  
Field  
Description  
Server Name/IP  
Server Type  
Port  
Enter the name or IP address of the server.  
Enter the type of server.  
Enter the port number your server uses for  
authentication.  
Shared Secret  
Enter the shared secret used by your server.  
It must match the shared secret on the  
RADIUS server.  
Time Out (sec’s)  
Enter the number of seconds the access point  
should wait before authentication fails.  
If the server does not respond within this  
time, the access point tries to contact the next  
defined authentication server.  
Use this server for  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-13 Server-Based Security Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
EAP Authentication  
Yes—Use this server for EAP  
authentication.  
In this type of authentication, the access  
point relays authentication messages  
between the server and the  
authenticating client device.  
No—Do not use this server for EAP  
authentication.  
Click see detail to see for which versions this  
setting is valid.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-13 Server-Based Security Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
MAC Address Authentication  
Yes—Use this server for MAC-based  
authentication.  
This allows only client devices with  
specified MAC addresses to associate  
and pass data through the access point.  
Client devices with MAC addresses not  
in a list of allowed MAC addresses are  
not allowed to associate with the access  
point.  
No—Do not use this server for  
MAC-based authentication.  
Click see detail to see for which versions this  
setting is valid.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-13 Server-Based Security Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
802.1X Protocol Version (For  
EAP Authentication)  
Draft 7—No radio firmware versions  
compliant with Draft 7 have LEAP  
capability, so you should not need to  
select this setting.  
Draft 8—Select this option if  
LEAP-enabled client devices that  
associate with this access point use radio  
firmware versions 4.13, 4.16, or 4.23, or  
if workgroup bridges associating with  
this access point use firmware version  
8.58 or earlier.  
Draft 10—Select this option if client  
devices that associate with this access  
point or bridge use Microsoft Windows  
XP EAP authentication, if  
LEAP-enabled client devices that  
associate with this bridge use radio  
firmware version 4.25 or later, or if  
workgroup bridges associating with this  
access point use firmware version 8.65  
or later.  
This is the default setting in access point  
later.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring Services  
Use this option to configure various system features and support services on the  
device.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services. The menu expands and the Services dialog box displays in the  
right pane.  
Select one of the following from the Services menu:  
Console/Telnet—See Configuring Console/Telnet Settings, page 3-63.  
Hot Standby—See Configuring Hot Standby Settings, page 3-65.  
Routing—See Configuring Routing Settings, page 3-67.  
CDP—See Configuring CDP Settings, page 3-68.  
DNS—See Configuring DNS Settings, page 3-69.  
FTP—See Configuring FTP Settings, page 3-70.  
HTTP—See Configuring HTTP Settings, page 3-72.  
SNMP—See Configuring SNMP Settings, page 3-73.  
SNTP—See Configuring SNTP Settings, page 3-74.  
Accounting—See Configuring Accounting Settings, page 3-75.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring Start-Up Settings  
Use this option to configure the access point for your network's BOOTP or DHCP  
servers for automatic assignment of IP addresses.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > Start-Up. The Services: Start-Up dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-14 Services Start-Up Settings  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Configuration Server Protocol  
None—Use this setting if your network  
does not have an automatic system for IP  
address assignment.  
BOOTP—Use this setting if IP  
addresses are hard-coded based on MAC  
addresses.  
DHCP—Use this setting if IP addresses  
are “leased” for predetermined periods  
of time.  
Use prior Config Server settings From the list, select one of the following:  
if no server responds?  
yes— Use this setting to have the access  
point save the boot server's most recent  
response.  
no—Use this setting to not use the most  
recent response.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-14 Services Start-Up Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Read “.ini” file from file server? From the list, select one of the following:  
always—Use this setting for the access  
point to always load configuration  
settings from an .ini file on the server.  
never—Use this setting for the access  
point to never load configuration  
settings from an .ini file on the server.  
if specified by server—Use this setting  
for the access point to load configuration  
settings from an .ini file on the server if  
the server’s DHCP or BOOTP response  
specifies that an .ini file is available.  
BOOTP Server Timeout (sec’s) Enter the length of time the access point  
waits to receive a response from a single  
BOOTP server.  
DHCP Multiple-Offer Timeout Enter the length of time the access point  
(sec’s)  
waits to receive a response when there are  
multiple DHCP servers.  
DHCP Requested Lease  
Duration (min’s)  
Enter the length of time the access point  
requests for an IP address lease from your  
DHCP server.  
DHCP Minimum Lease Duration Enter the shortest amount of time the access  
(min’s)  
point accepts for an IP address lease. The  
access point ignores leases shorter than this  
period.  
DHCP Class Identifier  
Enter the access point’s group name.  
The DHCP server uses the group name to  
determine the response to send to the access  
point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Configuring Console/Telnet Settings  
Use this option to configure the access point to work with a terminal emulator or  
through Telnet.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > Console/Telnet. The Services: Console/Telnet dialog box  
appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-15 Services > Console/ Telnet Settings  
Field  
Description  
Baud Rate  
Enter a rate from 110 to 115,200, expressed  
in bits per second.  
The rate you enter is dependent on the  
capability of the computer you use to open  
the access point management system.  
Parity  
From the list, select one of the following:  
None—Use this setting to use no parity  
bit.  
Even—Use this setting to make the total  
number of bits even.  
Odd—Use this setting to make the total  
number of bits odd.  
Data Bits  
From the list, select one of the data bit  
settings.  
Stop Bits  
From the list, select one of the stop bit  
settings.  
Flow Control  
From the list, select one of the following:  
None—Use this setting to indicate no  
flow control is used.  
SW Xonn/Xoff—Use this setting to  
indicate the method information is sent  
between pieces of equipment to prevent  
loss of data when too much information  
arrives at the same time on one device.  
Terminal Type  
From the list, select one of the following:  
teletype—Use this setting if your  
terminal emulator does not support  
ANSI.  
ANSI—Use this setting to offer graphic  
features such as reverse video buttons  
and underlined links.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-15 Services > Console/ Telnet Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Columns (64-132)  
Enter a number to define the width of the  
terminal emulator display within the range of  
64 characters to 132 characters.  
Lines (16-50)  
Telnet  
Enter a number to define the height of the  
terminal emulator display within the range of  
16 characters to 50 characters.  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable—Use this setting to enable  
Telnet access to the management system.  
Telnet access to the management system.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Configuring Hot Standby Settings  
Use this option to configure a standby access point as a client device associated  
to a monitored access point.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Services > Hot Standby. The Services: Hot Standby dialog box appears.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 2  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Hot Standby Mode  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable—Use this setting to allow hot standby  
mode.  
Disable—Use this setting to disable hot  
standby mode.  
Service Set ID (SSID)  
Enter the monitored access point’s SSID.  
MAC Address for the  
Monitored AP  
Enter the monitored access point’s MAC address.  
Polling Frequency (1-30)  
Enter the number of seconds between each query  
the standby access point sends to the monitored  
access point.  
Timeout for Each Polling  
(1-600)  
Enter the number of seconds the standby access  
point should wait for a response from the  
monitored access point has malfunctioned.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring Routing Settings  
Use this option to configure the access point to communicate with the IP network  
routing system.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > Routing. The Services: Routing dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Default Gateway  
Enter the IP address of your network's  
default gateway in this entry field.  
The entry 255.255.255.255 indicates no  
gateway.  
New Network Route  
Destination Network  
Enter the IP address of the destination  
network.  
Gateway  
Enter the IP address of the gateway used to  
reach the destination network.  
Subnet Mask  
Enter the subnet mask associated with the  
destination network.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Click Add to add an additional network route for the access point.  
To remove a network route, select it from the list, then click Remove.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 5  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Configuring CDP Settings  
Use this option to enable, disable, or adjust the access point's CDP settings.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > CDP. The Services: CDP dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable—Use this setting to enable CDP.  
Disable—Use this setting to disable  
CDP.  
Packet Hold Time  
Packet Sent Every  
Enter the number of seconds other  
CDP-enabled devices should consider the  
access point’s CDP information valid.  
Enter the number of seconds between each  
CDP packet the access point sends.  
This value should always be less than the  
packet hold time.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Configuring DNS Settings  
Use this option to configure the access point to work with your network's Domain  
Name System (DNS) server.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > DNS. The Services: DNS dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-16 Services > DNS Settings  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Domain Name System (DNS)  
Enable—Use this option if your network  
DNS.  
Disable—Use this option if you network  
does not use DNS.  
Default Domain  
Enter the name of your network’s IP domain.  
Your entry might look like this:  
mycompany.com  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-16 Services > DNS Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Domain Name Servers  
Enter the IP addresses of up to three domain  
name servers on your network.  
Domain Suffix  
Enter the portion of the full domain name  
that you would like omitted from access  
point displays.  
For example, the full name of a computer  
might be “mycomputer.mycompany.com.”If  
you set the domain suffix to  
would be displayed as “mycomputer.”  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Configuring FTP Settings  
Use this option to configure File Transfer Protocol settings for the access point.  
All non-browser file transfers are governed by these settings.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > FTP. The Services: FTP dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-17 Services > FTP Settings  
Field  
Description  
From the list select one of the following:  
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)  
TFTP  
FTP  
Default File Server  
Enter the IP address or DNS name of the file  
server where the access point should look for  
FTP files.  
FTP Directory  
Enter the file server directory that contains  
the firmware image files.  
FTP User Name  
Enter the username assigned to your FTP  
server.  
You do not need to enter a name in this field  
if you selected TFTP.  
FTP User Password  
Enter the password associated with the file  
server’s username.  
field if you selected TFTP.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring HTTP Settings  
Use this option to configure HTTP settings for the access point.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > HTTP The Services: HTTP dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Allow Non-Console Browsing  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable—Use this setting to allow  
browsing to the management system.  
Disable—Use this setting to make the  
management system accessible only  
through the console and Telnet  
interfaces.  
HTTP Port  
provides web access.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring SNMP Settings  
Use this option to configure settings for notifications to be sent to an SNMP  
server.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > SNMP. The Services: SNMP dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Simple Network Management  
Protocol (SNMP)  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable—Use this setting to allow event  
notifications to be sent to an SNMP  
server.  
Disable—Use this setting to not allow  
event notifications to be sent to an  
SNMP server.  
SNMP Trap Destination  
SNMP Trap Community  
Enter the IP address or the host name of the  
server running the SNMP Management  
software.  
Enter the SNMP community name.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring SNTP Settings  
Use this option to configure time server settings.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > SNTP. The Services: SNTP dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Field  
Description  
Simple Network Time Protocol From the list, select one of the following:  
(SNTP)  
Enable—Use this setting if your network  
uses Simple Network Time Protocol.  
Disable—Use this setting if your  
network does not use Simple Network  
Time Protocol.  
Default Time Server  
GMT Offset (hr)  
Enter enter the server’s IP address.  
From the list, select the time zone in which  
the access point operates.  
Use Daylight Savings Time  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable—Use this setting to have the  
access point automatically adjust to  
Daylight Savings Time.  
Disable—Use this setting to not have the  
access point automatically adjust to  
Daylight Savings Time.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Configuring Accounting Settings  
Use this option to configure settings that enable you to send network accounting  
information about wireless client devices to a RADIUS server on your network.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Services > Accounting. The Services: Accounting dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-18 Accounting Settings  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Enable accounting  
enable—Use this setting to turn on  
accounting for your wireless network.  
disable—Use this setting to turn off  
accounting for your wireless network  
Enable delaying to report STOP  
enable—Use this setting to delay  
sending a stop report to the server when  
a client device disassociates from the  
access point.  
The delay reduces accounting activity  
for client devices that disassociate from  
the access point and then quickly  
reassociate.  
disable—Use this setting to not delay  
sending a stop report to the server when  
a client device disassociates from the  
access point.  
Minimum delay time to report  
STOP (sec)  
Enter the number of seconds the access point  
waits before sending a stop report to the  
server when a client device disassociates  
from the access point.  
Server Name/IP  
Server Type  
Enter the name or IP address of the server to  
which the access point sends accounting  
data.  
Select RADIUS from the list.  
(Additional types may be added in future  
software releases.)  
Port  
Enter the communication port setting used by  
the access point and the server.  
The default setting, 1813, is the correct  
setting for Cisco Aironet access points and  
Cisco secure ACS.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-18 Accounting Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Shared Secret  
Enter the shared secret used by your server.  
It must match the shared secret on the  
RADIUS server.  
Time Out (sec’s)  
Enable Update  
Enter the number of seconds the access point  
should wait before authentication fails.  
If the server does not respond within this  
time, the access point tries to contact the next  
defined authentication server.  
From the list, select one of the following:  
enable—Use this setting to allow  
accounting update messages for wireless  
clients.  
With updates enabled, the access point  
sends an accounting start message when  
a wireless client associates to the access  
point, sends updates at regular intervals  
while the wireless client is associated to  
the access point, and sends an  
accounting stop message when the client  
disassociates from the access point.  
disable—Use this setting to not allow  
accounting update messages.  
With updates disabled, the access point  
sends only accounting start and  
accounting stop messages to the server.  
Update Delay (sec’s)  
Enter the update interval in seconds.  
If you use 360, the access point sends an  
accounting update message for each  
associated client device every 6 minutes.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-18 Accounting Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Use this server for  
EAP Authentication  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Yes—Use this server for EAP  
authentication.  
In this type of authentication, the access  
point relays authentication messages  
between the server and the  
authenticating client device.  
No—Do not use this server for EAP  
authentication.  
non-EAP Authentication  
From the list, select one of the following:  
Yes—Use this server for non-EAP  
authentication.  
authentication.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring Events  
This option enables to you to customize the display of access point events (alerts,  
warnings, and normal activity).  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Events. The menu expands and the Events dialog box displays in the right  
pane.  
Select one of the following from the Events menu:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Event Handling—See Configuring Event Handling, page 3-79.  
Event Notifications—See Configuring Event Notification, page 3-84.  
Configuring Event Handling  
The event settings control how events are handled by the access point: counted,  
displayed in the log, recorded, or announced in a notification. The settings are  
color coded: red for fatal errors, magenta for alerts, blue for warnings, and green  
for information.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Events > Event Handling. The Events: Event Handling dialog box  
appears.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 2  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-19 Event Handling Settings  
Field  
Description  
From the list, select one of the following:  
System Fatal  
Protocol Fatal  
Count—Use this option to tally the total  
events occurring in this category without  
any form of notification or display.  
Network Port Fatal  
System Alert  
Display Console—Use this option to  
provide a read-only display of the event  
but not record it.  
Protocol Alert  
Network Port Alert  
External Alert  
Record—Use this option to make a  
record of the event in the log and provide  
a read-only display of the event.  
System Warning  
Protocol Warning  
Network Port Warning  
External Warning  
System Information  
Protocol Information  
Network Port Information  
External Information  
Notify—Use this option to makes a  
record of the event in the log, display the  
event, and tell the access point to notify  
someone of the occurrence.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-19 Event Handling Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Handle Alerts as Severity Level From the list, select one of the following:  
systemFatal—Indicates an event that  
prevents operation of the device as a  
whole.  
protocolFatal—Indicates an event that  
prevents operation of a specific  
communications protocol in use, such as  
HTTP or IP.  
portFatal—Indicates an event that  
prevents operation of the Ethernet or  
radio network interface.  
systemAlert—Indicates that you need to  
take action to correct a condition on the  
device as a whole.  
protocolAlert—Indicates that you need  
to take action to correct a condition on a  
specific communications protocol in use,  
such as HTTP or IP.  
portAlert—Indicates that you need to  
take action to correct the condition on  
the Ethernet or radio network interface.  
externalAlert—Indicates that you need  
to take action to correct the condition on  
a device on the network.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-19 Event Handling Settings (continued)  
Field Description  
systemWarning—Indicates that an error  
or failure may have occurred on the  
device as a whole.  
protocolWarning—Indicates that an  
error or failure may have occurred on a  
specific communications protocol in use,  
such as HTTP or IP.  
portWarning—Indicates that an error or  
failure may have occurred on an Ethernet  
or radio network interface.  
externalWarning—Indicates that an  
error or failure may have occurred on a  
device.  
systemInfo—Notification that some sort  
of event has occurred on a device.  
protocolInfo—Notification that some  
sort of event has ocurred on a  
communications protocol in use, such as  
HTTP or IP.  
portInfo—Notification that some sort of  
event has ocurred on an Ethernet or radio  
network interface.  
externalInfo—Notification that some  
sort of event has ocurred on a device.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-19 Event Handling Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Maximum Number of Bytes  
Stored per Alert Packet  
Enter the maximum number of bytes the  
access point stores for each Station Alert  
packet when packet tracing is enabled.  
(0- 2312)  
If you use 0, the access point does not store  
bytes for Station Alert packets; it only logs  
the event.  
Note  
Changing this setting may cause  
the access point to reboot.  
Maximum Memory Reserved for Enter the number of bytes reserved for the  
Detailed Event Trace Buffer  
(bytes) (0-8388608)  
Detailed Event Trace Buffer.  
The Detailed Event Trace Buffer is a tool for  
tracing the contents of packets between  
specified stations on your network.  
Note  
the access point to reboot.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Configuring Event Notification  
Use this option to enable and configure notification of fatal, alert, warning, and  
information events to destinations external to the access point, such as an SNMP  
server or a Syslog system.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Events > Event Notification. The Events: Event Notification dialog box  
appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Table 3-20 Events > Event Notification Settings  
Field  
Description  
Should Notify-Disposition  
Events generate SNMP Traps?  
From the list, select one of the of the  
following:  
Yes—Use this option to send event  
notifications to an SNMP server.  
No—Use this option if you do not want  
to send notifications to an SNMP server.  
SNMP Trap Destination  
SNMP Trap Community  
Enter the IP address or the host name of the  
server running the SNMP Management  
software.  
Enter the SNMP community name.  
Should Notify-Disposition  
Events generate Syslog  
Messages?  
From the list, select one of the of the  
following:  
Yes—Use this option to send event  
notifications to a Syslog server.  
No—Use this option if you do not want  
to send notifications to a Syslog server.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Table 3-20 Events > Event Notification Settings (continued)  
Field  
Description  
Syslog Destination Address  
Enter the IP address or the host name of the  
server running Syslog.  
Syslog Facility Number  
notifications.  
Step 3  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Configuring Custom Values  
This option enables to you to enter custom values that might not be available in  
the Template Menu. It also allows you to quickly enter a value, if you know the  
exact value you want to change, instead of going through the menu. (See  
Examples, page 3-86.)  
Note  
This option should be used only by advanced users who have a good  
understanding of the MIB variables they are setting.  
Templates with custom key values are not validated.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Configure > Templates > Custom Values. The Custom Values dialog box  
appears.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.  
Step 2  
Complete the following:  
Note  
You must enter the exact syntax for the setting to work properly.  
Field  
Description  
Key  
Enter a valid MIB key. (See Examples,  
page 3-86.)  
Value  
Enter a valid MIB value. (See Examples,  
page 3-86.)  
Step 3  
Click Add to add the custom value to the list.  
Note  
If the custom value you enter is the same as an existing one in the  
Template Menu, the custom value will override the value in the menu.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
To remove a custom value, select it from the list, then click Remove.  
Select one of the following in the left pane:  
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the  
Template, page 3-89.)  
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template  
Categories, page 3-2.)  
Examples  
Following are examples of custom key values that can be entered:  
Set system contact on access points.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Key: sysContact.0  
Value: ABC, XYZ Inc.  
Set system location for access points.  
Key:sysLocation.0  
Value: Bldg ABC, XYZ Inc.  
Set up a user for an access point  
Key:userMgrUserName.x  
Value: testUser  
Key:userMgrPassword.x  
Value: testPassword  
Key:userMgrCapabilities.x  
Value: 20  
where:  
x is the next available index in the user manager table (userMgrConfig  
Table)  
Capabilities are the sum of any of the following: 0=none;  
1=Administrator; 2=Write; 4=Firmware Update; 8=Identity Update;  
16=SNMP Community  
Reboot an access point.  
Key:tsMsgSend0  
Value: 2  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
3-87  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Classify workgroup bridges as network infrastructure  
Key:awcDot11DesiredSSIDInfrastructureWGB.2  
Value: false  
where the possible values are T (true) and F (false)  
Set the DHCP Client Identifier Type  
Key:bootconfigDhcpClientIdType  
Value: ethernet10Mb  
where the possible values are text or numeric:  
ethernet10Mb or 1  
experimentalEthernet3Mb or 3  
amateurRadioAxDot25 or 3proteonProNetTokenRing or 4  
chaos or 5  
ieee802Networks or 6  
arcnet or 7  
hyperchannel or 8  
lanstar or 9  
autonet or 10  
localTalk or 11  
localNet or 12  
nonHardware or 128  
Set the DHCP client Identifier Value  
Key: bootconfigDhcpClientIdValue  
Value: 22  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Is MAC alone sufficient for to be fully authenticated  
Key: awcFtEnableMacOrEapAuth  
Value: F  
where the possible values are T (true) and F (false)  
Set Rogue AP alert timeout (minutes)  
Key: awcFtRogueApAlertTimeout  
Value: 29  
Use symbol extensions  
Key: awcDot11SymbolExtensionsEnabled.2  
Value: 2  
where the possible values are T (true) and F (false)  
Previewing the Template  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Click Preview. A window displays the configuration choices you have made to the  
template.  
Click Finish. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)  
Finishing the Template  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Click Finish in the left pane to complete creating a template. The Finish dialog  
box appears in the right pane.  
Note  
It is recommended that you always validate the template before saving  
it.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Step 2  
Click Validate if you want to check the template configuration. A window  
displays a message indicating for which devices and versions the configuration  
template you just created is valid.  
Note  
Templates containing custom key values are not validated.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Check Enable Version Check if you want the system to make sure you apply the  
templates only to devices with valid versions.  
If you do not enable the version check, templates will be applied to devices even  
when the configuration is not valid for the device version.  
Click Save to create the template. The screen refreshes and the template name  
appears in the Existing Templates listbox.  
Creating a Template  
Use this option to create a configuration template.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Configure > Templates. The Templates dialog box appears.  
Enter a unique name. (See Naming Guidelines, page A-1 for details.)  
Click Create New. The window refreshes with Template Creation menu in the left  
pane and the Template Name dialog box in the right pane.  
Step 4  
Select the choices in the left pane to create a configuration template. For a  
description, see Template Choices, page 3-2.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Using the Templates  
Copying a Template  
Use this option to copy a configuration template that you can use as a base for  
another template.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Configure > Templates. The Templates dialog box appears.  
Select the template you want to copy from the Existing Templates box, then click  
Create Copy. A dialog box appears asking you to enter a name for the copy.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Enter a unique name. (See Naming Guidelines, page A-1 for details.)  
Click OK. The Templates window refreshes and the new name appears in the  
Existing Templates list.  
Step 5  
Click Edit. (See Editing a Template, page 3-91.)  
Editing a Template  
Use this option to edit a configuration template.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Configure > Templates. The Templates dialog box appears.  
Select the template you want to edit from the Existing Templates box, then click  
Edit. The window refreshes with Template Creation menu in the left pane and the  
Template Name dialog box in the right pane.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Step 3  
Select the choices in the Template Menu to create a configuration template. For a  
description, see Template Choices, page 3-2.  
Deleting a Template  
Use this option to delete a configuration template.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Configure > Templates. The Templates dialog box appears.  
Select the template you want to delete from the Existing Templates box, then click  
Delete. A window appears asking if you want to delete the template.  
Step 3  
Click OK to delete it.  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
This is window allows you view a list of all the jobs in their various states. It also  
allows you to create, edit, and filter, and undo configuration jobs.  
The topics covered in this section are:  
Filtering a Job, page 3-102  
Editing a Job, page 3-102  
Deleting a Job, page 3-103  
Stopping a Job, page 3-103  
Viewing Job Run Details, page 3-103  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Related Topic  
Using the Templates, page 3-1.  
Job Choices  
When you create or edit a configuration job, the following choices appear in the  
left pane of the Jobs window:  
Note  
These are steps that must be completed but do not have to be done in order.  
1. Job Name—See Naming the Job, page 3-93.  
2. Select Devices—See Naming the Job, page 3-93.  
3. Select Template—See Selecting a Template, page 3-95.  
4. Schedule Job—See Scheduling a Job, page 3-97.  
Caution  
Clicking on another tab before you have saved your entries in this window will  
cause the window to reset and you will lose all the information you entered.  
Naming the Job  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Click Job Name. The Job Name dialog box appears.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Step 2  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Job windows up until that point.  
Table 3-21 Job Nam e  
Field  
Description  
Job Name  
Enter a name for the job.  
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Enter a description of the job.  
Description  
Protocol  
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Select the type of protocol used: HTTP or SNMP.  
Note  
If you select SNMP, you will not be able to use  
the Undo feature; it is only supported for  
HTTP-based configuration jobs.  
Step 3  
From the menu in the left pane, go to the next step, Select Devices. (For additional  
information, see Selecting Devices, page 3-94.)  
Selecting Devices  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Click Select Devices. The Select window appears.  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Job windows up until that point.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Step 2  
From the device selector, click the folder from which you want to build a device  
list.  
Clicking the folder displays the folder’s contents in the All Available Devices list  
box.  
Repeat this step as many times as necessary to select devices from the folder in  
which they reside.  
Step 3  
From the All Available Devices list, select folders or individual devices, then click  
Add. The devices appear in the Selected Devices list box.  
Note  
If you select a folder, the template will be applied to all of the devices  
in that folder. If a device is subsequently added to the folder, the  
template is applied to that device.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
To remove devices, select them from the Devices in Group list, then click  
Remove.  
From the menu in the left pane, go to the next step, Select Template. (For  
additional information, see Selecting a Template, page 3-95.)  
Selecting a Template  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Click Select Template. The Select Template window appears.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Step 2  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Job windows up until that point.  
Ta b l e 3 - 22 S el e c t Tem p l ate  
Field  
Description  
Configuration Template  
From the list, select the template which you  
want to apply to the devices.  
Details  
Name  
Displays the name of the selected template.  
Device Types  
Displays the device types that are valid for  
the selected template.  
Device Versions  
Displays the device versions for the device  
types listed in the Device Type field.  
Each device type’s valid versions are  
displayed in sequence and grouped using  
parentheses.  
Description  
Displays the template description.  
Version Check Enabled  
Indicates whether the version check is  
enabled.  
(The check is enabled using the Finish step in  
the Template Menu.)  
Step 3  
From the menu in the left pane, go to the next step, Schedule Job. (For additional  
information, see Scheduling a Job, page 3-97.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Scheduling a Job  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Click Schedule Job. The Schedule Job dialog box appears.  
Complete the following:  
Note  
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any  
entries you have made in other Job windows up until that point.  
Table 3-23 Schedule Job  
Field  
Description  
Click to run the job. (The job begins running in 2 minutes.)  
Run Now  
Note  
This option ignores any dates you have entered  
in Start Date and Start Time.  
Start Date  
Start Time  
From the lists, select the month, day, and year you want  
your job to run.  
From the list, select the hour and minutes of the day you  
want your job to run.  
Repeat  
Enable  
Every  
Check to run the job repeatedly.  
Indicate how often you want the job to repeat by entering a  
numerical value, then selecting an interval of time: Hours,  
Days, Months, or Years.  
Step 3  
Tip  
From the menu in the left pane, go to the next step, Finish. (For additional  
information, see Finishing Scheduling, page 3-98.)  
You can stop a running job by clicking Stop Job.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Finishing Scheduling  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Click Finish in the left pane to complete creating a job. The Finish dialog box  
appears in the right pane.  
Do one of the following:  
Note  
It is recommended that you always validate the job before saving it.  
Click Validate if you want to check the job.  
A window displays a confirmation message if the job is successful, and an  
informational message if the selected template in the job is not valid for the  
selected devices.  
Note  
Jobs with templates containing custom key values are not validated.  
Click Save to create the job. The screen refreshes and  
The job name appears in the Scheduled Jobs list.  
A confirmation window appears with the job summary.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Creating a Configuration Job  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Configure > Jobs. The Jobs window appears.  
Enter a name for the job. See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Click Create Job. The window refreshes with Job Creation menu in the left pane  
and the Job Name dialog box in the right pane.  
Step 4  
Select the numbered choices in the left pane to create a job. For a description, see  
Job Choices, page 3-93.  
Viewing Configuration Job Status  
This is window allows you to view job status. It also allows you to filter a job, edit  
a job, view details about the job and undo a job.  
Device data is polled is every 15 minutes by default, and the duration that job data  
is retained is 30 days. To change either default, see Managing System Parameters,  
page 5-58.  
Filtering a Job, page 3-102  
Editing a Job, page 3-102  
Deleting a Job, page 3-103  
Stopping a Job, page 3-103  
Viewing Job Run Details, page 3-103  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Related Topic  
Using the Templates, page 3-1  
Viewing the Job State  
Procedure  
Step 1  
From the Job State list, select the type of job whose status you want to check. The  
window refreshes and the jobs are displayed.  
The tables vary depending on which type of Job State you selected: Scheduled and  
Unscheduled, Running, or All:  
Scheduled and Unscheduled  
Field  
Description  
Job Name  
Recurring  
Next Schedule  
The job name.  
Whether the job recurs.  
For scheduled jobs, this indicates the next  
time the job will run. For completed jobs, this  
is last time the job ran.  
Last Run Status  
The status of the last run.  
Running  
Tip  
You can stop a running job by clicking Stop Job.  
Field  
Description  
Job Name  
Recurring  
Job Start Time  
The job name.  
Whether the job recurs.  
The time the job started.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Field  
Description  
Percent Complete  
The percent of the job that has completed  
running.  
Next Schedule  
The next time the job is scheduled to run.  
All  
Field  
Description  
Job Name  
Recurring  
Job State  
The job name.  
Whether the job recurs.  
The state of the job.  
Note  
A job in a DidNotStart state must  
be rescheduled.  
Next Schedule  
Last Run Status  
For scheduled jobs, this indicates the next  
time the job will run. For completed jobs, this  
is last time the job ran.  
The status of the job the last time it run.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
To sort table data, click on the column heading by which you want to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
You can do any of the following:  
a. Filter the job—See Filtering a Job, page 3-102.  
b. Edit the job—See Editing a Job, page 3-102.  
c. Delete the job—See Deleting a Job, page 3-103,  
d. Stop a job—See Stopping a Job, page 3-103.  
e. View the run details—See Viewing Job Run Details, page 3-103.  
f. Refresh the screen—Click Refresh.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-1 01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Filtering a Job  
Use this option to filter jobs from the displayed list. Filtering this way allows you  
to display a limited set of jobs, making it easier to search for a particular job if  
you know the name.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Click Filter Job. The Filter Job dialog box appears.  
Enter the name, or part of the a name, on which to filter. (Use % as a wildcard to  
filter jobs. For example, entering %name% will filter all the jobs that contain  
"name.")  
Step 3  
Click Apply filter. The Job window refreshes and the matching jobs are displayed  
on the Jobs list.  
Note  
The filter is only applied until the page is refreshed.  
Editing a Job  
Use this option to edit jobs from the displayed list of jobs.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select the job from the list which you would like to edit.  
Click Edit. The Job Name dialog box appears.  
Select the choices in the Template Menu to create a configuration template. For a  
description, see Job Choices, page 3-93.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Deleting a Job  
Use this option to delete jobs from the displayed list of jobs. Jobs that are  
scheduled, unscheduled, completed and did not start can be deleted. Jobs that are  
running cannot be deleted; they can be stopped.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select the job from the list which you would like to edit.  
Click Delete.  
Stopping a Job  
Use this option to stop a job when it is in a running state.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select the job from the list which you would like to stop.  
Click Stop Job. A window displays to confirm that you want to stop the job.  
Click OK, and the job stops.  
Viewing Job Run Details  
Use this option to view details about a job, or to undo a job from the displayed list  
of jobs.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
From the All Jobs table displayed in Configure > Jobs window, select a job for  
which you would like to see details, then click Job Run Detail.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-1 03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
Step 2  
The details window appears with the Job Runs table:  
Field  
Description  
Select Run  
Used to select a job for which you want to see  
more details.  
Job Start Time  
Job End Time  
Job Status  
The time the job started.  
The time the job ended.  
Percent Complete  
The percent of the job that completed.  
Step 3  
Do any of the following:  
To view details for a particular job run or to undo a job, select the job, then  
click Show Run Details. The Job Run details table displays the information.  
(See Viewing the Job Run Details Table, page 3-104.)  
To view the job run log, click Job Run Log. A window displays all the details  
for the selected job number.  
To refresh the table, click Refresh.  
Viewing the Job Run Details Table  
The Job Runs Details table displays the following information:  
Field  
Description  
Device Name  
Start Time  
End Time  
Status  
The name of the device.  
The time the job started.  
The time the job ended.  
The status of the job.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
To sort table data, click on the column heading by which you want to sort the  
data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
To select all the jobs in the table, click Select All.  
To deselect all the jobs in the table, click DeSelect All.  
Note  
If you have multiple screens, you must Select All or DeSelect All one  
screen at a time.  
To undo the selected configuration job, click Undo.  
The Undo feature is supported only for HTTP-based configuration jobs (not  
SNMP-based configurations jobs). It is not supported for:  
Custom Values  
Security options: Local Admin Authentication under the Local Admin  
Access; Encryption Key Values under Local AP/Client Security; Shared  
Secret under Server-Based Security; and Shared Secret under  
Accounting.  
FTP username and password  
Previously undone jobs  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
3-1 05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Configuring Devices  
Managing Configuration Jobs  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
3-106  
C H A P T E R  
4
Using Reports  
The Reports tab displays information about your devices. You can save and email  
reports. You can also set specific times for emailed reports to be run and sent  
automatically.  
The reports available are dependent on the groups of devices and individual  
devices you choose from the selector in the left pane.  
Following are the subtabs under Reports:  
Note  
Some of the subtabs may not be visible to some users.  
Wireless Clients—See Displaying Wireless Client Reports, page 4-1  
Current—See Displaying Current Reports, page 4-6  
Trends—See Displaying Trends, page 4-21  
Scheduled Email Jobs—See Scheduling Email Jobs, page 4-29  
Displaying Wireless Client Reports  
Wireless client reports provide information about the type of client that is  
associating with an access point, information about how much bandwidth the  
client is using, and a history of which access points the client has been associated  
with.  
Using this window, you can search for a wireless client based on their MAC  
address or name.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Wireless Client Reports  
The frequency with which the Wireless Clients reports are updated is 5 minutes  
by default. To change the default setting, see Managing System Parameters,  
page 5-58.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Following are the report types you can view:  
Client Detail Report—See Displaying a Client Detail Report, page 4-2  
Client Statistics Report—See Displaying a Client Statistics Report, page 4-3  
Client Historical Association Report—See Displaying a Client Historical  
Association Report, page 4-5  
Displaying a Client Detail Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Reports > Wireless Clients. The Wireless Clients selector appears in the  
left pane.  
From the list, select the method you want to use to search for clients: by MAC  
address or name.  
Enter the MAC address or name. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard to  
denote numbers and letters.  
Note  
The MAC address must be entered in hexadecimal, for example  
0070eb37c90.  
Step 4  
Click Search. A list appears in the left pane.  
If you chose MAC address in the previous step, MAC addresses are listed; if you  
chose name, names are listed.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Wireless Client Reports  
Step 5  
Click the MAC address or name. The right pane refreshes and displays the Client  
Detail Report, which is the default report, with the following information:  
Column  
Description  
Name  
The name assigned to the wireless client  
device.  
IP Address  
The IP address of the wireless client device.  
The type of wireless client device.  
Classification  
Associated with  
The name or IP of the access point with  
which it was last associated.  
State  
The operational state of the wireless client  
device.  
Time last seen  
The time the client was last seen by the  
system.  
Software Version  
MAC Address  
The version of wireless client software.  
The MAC address of the wireless client.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying a Client Statistics Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Select Reports > Wireless Clients. The Wireless Clients selector appears in the  
left pane.  
From the list, select the method you want to use to search for clients: by MAC  
address or name.  
Enter the MAC address or name. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard to  
denote numbers and letters.  
Click Search. A list appears in the left pane.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Wireless Client Reports  
Step 5  
Step 6  
Step 7  
Select the MAC address or name. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select Client Statistics Report.  
Click View. The Client Statistics Report displays in the right pane with the  
following information:  
Table 4-1 Client Statistics Report  
Column  
Description  
Name  
The name of the wireless client.  
The IP address of the wireless client.  
IP address  
Time last seen  
The time the wireless client was last seen by  
the system.  
Packets transmitted  
Octets transmitted  
Packets received  
The number of packets transmitted.  
The number of octets transmitted.  
The number of packets received.  
The number of octets received.  
Octets received  
Latest received signal strength  
Latest signal quality  
A tally of the received signal quality.  
The current index of radio signal quality.  
Sleep time in power save mode The number of beacon intervals across which  
the station will sleep in power-save mode, or  
1 if the station will never be in power-save  
mode.  
Preferred transmission rate  
Short retries  
The preferred data transmission rate.  
The number of times the RTS (request to  
send) packet had to be retried.  
Latest short retries  
Long retries  
A tally of the number of retries.  
The number of times the data packet had to  
be retried.  
Latest long retries  
A tally of the number of retries.  
Received WEP errors  
Errors in transmitted packets  
Errors in received packets  
The number of received encryption errors.  
The number of errors in transmitted packets.  
The number of errors in received packets.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Wireless Client Reports  
Table 4-1 Client Statistics Report (continued)  
Column  
Description  
Errors in received octets  
Announcements sent  
The number of errors in received octets.  
The total number of announcement packets  
sent since the device was reset.  
Step 8  
Step 9  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying a Client Historical Association Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Reports > Wireless Clients. The Wireless Clients selector appears in the  
left pane.  
From the list, select the method you want to use to search for clients: by MAC  
address or name.  
Enter the MAC address or name. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard to  
denote numbers and letters.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Step 6  
Click Search. A list appears in the left pane.  
Select the MAC address or name. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select Client Historical Association Report.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Step 7  
Click View. The Client Historical Association Report displays in the right pane  
with the following information:  
Column  
Description  
Associated with  
The name or IP address of the AP.  
Click on this link to view the AP Summary Report and  
the Fault Summary.  
For more information, see Displaying an AP Summary  
Report, page 4-11.  
Client IP Address  
Software Version  
Time  
The IP address of the AP.  
The software version of the wireless client device.  
The time the client was last seen by the system.  
For more information, see Date and Time Display on  
the WLSE, page 1-2.  
Step 8  
Step 9  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
Step 10 To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
This window allows you to view current information about the monitored devices  
in your network. You can view, export, and email the reports.  
The frequency with which configuration data is collected from the devices is 15  
minutes by default. To change the default setting, see Managing System  
Parameters, page 5-58.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Following are the report types you can view:  
Access Points and Bridges  
Group Security Report—See Displaying a Group Security Report,  
Summary Report—See Displaying an AP Summary Report, page 4-11  
Detailed Report—See Displaying a Detailed Report, page 4-13  
Current Client Association—See Displaying a Current Client  
Association Report, page 4-15  
Report, page 4-16  
Switches  
Switch Summary Report—See Displaying a Switch Summary Report,  
page 4-17  
Bridge Connected to Switch Report, page 4-18  
Routers  
Router Summary Report—Displaying a Router Summary Report,  
page 4-19  
AP and Bridge Connected to Router Report—SeeDisplaying an AP and  
Bridge Connected to Router Report, page 4-20  
Displaying a Group Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
4-7  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Step 2  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder for the group  
reports you want to view. The right pane refreshes.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
From the Report Name list, select Group Report.  
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:  
Column  
Description  
AP Name  
The name of the access point.  
Click to view a detailed report. See  
Displaying a Detailed Report, page 4-13.  
AP IP Address  
The IP address of the access point.  
Click to open up a browser window to the  
AP Summary Status.  
Number of Clients connected  
Number of Bridges connected  
The number of clients currently connected  
to the access point.  
The number of bridges connected to the  
access point.  
Number of AP-Repeaters  
Connected  
The number of repeaters connected to the  
access point.  
Number of Users Connected  
Status (Fault)  
The number of current users.  
For more information, see Viewing Fault  
Details, page 2-6.  
Timestamp  
The time the access point’s state last  
changed.  
For more information, see Date and Time  
Display on the WLSE, page 1-2.  
Step 5  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying a Group Security Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder for the group  
security reports you want to view.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
From the Report Name list, select Group Security Report.  
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:  
Table 4-2 Group Security Report  
Column  
Description  
AP Name  
The name of the device.  
Click to view the AP Detailed Report, Fault  
Summary, and the EAP Authentication  
Report.  
For more information, see Naming  
Guidelines, page A-1.  
AP IP Address  
Encryption type  
The IP address of the device.  
Click to open up a browser window to the AP  
Summary Status.  
Indicates the type of encryption used: No  
Encryption, Optional, or Full Encryption.  
Length of WEP Key1 through 4 The WEP key length.  
(in bits)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Table 4-2 Group Security Report (continued)  
Column Description  
Authentication Type - Open  
System  
Indicates whether any device, regardless of  
its WEP keys, can authenticate and attempt  
to associate.  
Authentication Type - Shared  
Key  
Indicates whether an access point sends a  
query to any device attempting to associate  
with the access point.  
Status (Fault)  
Click to view the Fault Summary.  
For more information, see Viewing Fault  
Details, page 2-6.  
Link to EAP Authentication  
Report  
Click to view the EAP Authentication report.  
For more information, see Displaying an  
EAP Authentication Report, page 4-16.  
Timestamp  
The time the fault was reported.  
For more information, see Date and Time  
Display on the WLSE, page 1-2.  
Step 5  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Displaying an AP Summary Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder and select the  
device for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
From the Report Name list, select Summary Report.  
Click View. Two tables are displayed: the AP Summary Report and the Fault  
Summary.  
Table 4-3 AP Sum m ary Report  
Column  
Name  
Description  
The system name for the device.  
The time the fault was reported.  
Timestamp  
For more information, see Date and Time  
Display on the WLSE, page 1-2.  
MAC Address  
IP Address  
The device’s MAC address.  
The device’s IP address.  
Click to open up a browser window to the AP  
Summary Status.  
Software Version  
The version of software running on the  
device.  
Number of Clients connected  
Number of Bridges Connected  
The number of wireless clients connected to  
the device.  
The number of wireless bridges connected to  
the device.  
Number of AP-Repeaters  
Connected  
The number of AP repeaters connected to the  
device.  
Number of Users Connected  
The number of users currently connected to  
the device.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Table 4-3 AP Sum m ary Report (continued)  
Column Description  
Model  
The device’s radio SSID.  
Radio Service Set ID  
Root or Repeater  
Indicates whether the device is used as a root  
or repeater.  
Link to the Detailed Report  
Click to see details.  
For more information, see Displaying a  
Detailed Report, page 4-13.  
Link to the Association Report Click to see associations.  
For more information, see Displaying a  
Current Client Association Report,  
page 4-15.  
Link to the Access Point Web  
Page  
Click to open up a browser window to the AP  
Summary Status.  
For information on the Fault Summary, see Viewing Fault Details, page 2-6.  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Step 5  
Step 6  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Displaying a Detailed Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder and select the  
device for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
From the Report Name list, select Detailed Report.  
Click View. In addition to the Detailed Report, the Fault Summary, and the EAP  
Authentication Report are also displayed.  
Table 4-4 Detailed Report  
Column  
Description  
System Name  
Timestamp  
The system name for the device.  
The time the device’s state last changed.  
For more information, see Date and Time  
Display on the WLSE, page 1-2.  
MAC Address  
IP Address  
The device’s MAC address.  
The device’s IP address.  
Click to open up a browser window to the AP  
Summary Status.  
Software Version  
The device’s software version.  
Number of Clients connected  
The number of clients connected to the  
device.  
Number of Bridges Connected  
The number of bridges connected to the  
device.  
Number of AP-Repeaters  
Connected  
The number of AP repeaters connected to the  
device.  
Number of Users Connected  
Model  
The number of users connected to the device.  
The hardware model of the device.  
The device’s SSID.  
Radio Service Set ID  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Table 4-4 Detailed Report (continued)  
Column  
Description  
Root or Repeater  
Subnet Mask  
Indicates the role of the device.  
The subnet mask.  
Ensure Compatibility With  
2Mbps Clients  
Indicates whether it is compatible with  
2Mbps clients.  
Ensure Compatibility With  
non-Aironet 802.11  
Indicates whether it is compatible with  
802.11.  
SNMP Trap Destination  
The IP address or host name of the server  
running the SNMP Management software.  
HTTP Port  
The device’s HTTP setting.  
Hot StandBy  
Indicates whether the hot standby unit is in  
monitoring mode.  
If true, the current unit is in monitoring  
mode.  
Count of Access Point observed Number of access points seen by the access  
by this AP  
points.  
Current operating frequency  
channel  
The radio channel being used.  
Ethernet Port Status  
Radio Port Status  
The operational status of the Ethernet port.  
The operational status of the radio port.  
Transmit Power (mW)  
The access point’s transmission power  
setting in milliwatts.  
Switch IP (to which this AP is  
attached)  
The IP address of the switch to which this  
access point is attached.  
Switch Name (to which this AP The name of the switch to which this access  
is attached)  
point is attached.  
Encryption type  
Indicates that devices using WEP are allowed  
to communicate with the access point.  
Length of WEP key 1 through 4 The WEP key length.  
(in bits)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Table 4-4 Detailed Report (continued)  
Column  
Description  
Authentication Type - Open  
System  
Indicates whether any device, regardless of  
its WEP keys, can authenticate and attempt  
to associate.  
Authentication Type - Shared  
Key  
Indicates whether an access point sends a  
with the access point.  
Link to the Access Point Web  
Page  
Summary Status.  
For Fault Summary information, see Viewing Fault Details, page 2-6.  
For EAP Authentication Report, see Displaying an EAP Authentication  
Report, page 4-16.  
Step 5  
Step 6  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying a Current Client Association Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder and select the  
access point for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select Current Client Association Report.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Step 4  
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:  
Table 4-5  
Current Client Association Report  
Column  
Description  
Name  
The name of the client associated with the access point.  
The IP address of the wireless client.  
IP Address  
MAC Address  
Device Type  
Timestamp  
The wireless client’s MAC address.  
The wireless client device type.  
The time the device was last seen by the system.  
For more information, see Date and Time Display on the  
WLSE, page 1-2.  
State  
The operational state of the device.  
Step 5  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying an EAP Authentication Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder and select the  
access point for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select EAP Authentication Report.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Step 4  
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:  
Table 4-6 EAP Authentication Report  
Column  
Description  
Server Name  
Server Protocol  
Server Priority  
The name of the authentication server.  
The protocol used by the server.  
The priority of the server when multiple servers are  
configured for the same service.  
Server Port  
The communication port setting used by the access point  
and the server.  
Step 5  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying a Switch Summary Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the Switches folder and  
select the switch for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select Switch Summary Report.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Step 4  
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:  
Table 4-7  
Sw itch Sum m ary Report  
Column  
Description  
System Name  
IP Address  
The switch name.  
The switch IP address or hostname.  
The fault status.  
Status (Fault)  
Click for details. For more information, see  
Viewing Fault Details, page 2-6.  
System Description  
Location  
The location of the switch.  
The switch hardware type.  
The switch version.  
Product Type  
System Version  
Link to the AP and Bridge  
Connected  
Click for details.  
For more information, see Displaying an AP  
and Bridge Connected to Switch Report,  
page 4-18.  
Step 5  
Step 6  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Connected to Switch Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the Switches folder and  
select the switch for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Connected to Switch Report.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Step 4  
Click View. The report is displayed with the following headings:  
Table 4-8 AP and Bridge Connected to Sw itch Report  
Column  
Description  
Device Port  
AP Name  
The device port.  
The name of the access point or bridge connected to the  
switch.  
AP IP Address  
Status (Fault)  
The IP address of the access point or bridge connected to  
the switch.  
The fault status.  
Click for details. For more information, see Viewing Fault  
Details, page 2-6.  
Step 5  
Step 6  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying a Router Summary Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the Routers folder and  
select the router for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select Router Summary Report.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Current Reports  
Step 4  
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:  
Table 4-9  
Router Sum m ary Report  
Column  
Description  
System Name  
IP Address  
The router name.  
The router IP address.  
The fault status.  
Status (Fault)  
System Description  
Location  
A description of the router.  
The location of the router.  
The router hardware type.  
The router version.  
Product Type  
System Version  
Step 5  
Step 6  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Connected to Router Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the Routers folder and  
select the switch for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Connected to Router Report.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Trends  
Step 4  
Click View. The report is displayed with the following headings:  
Column  
Description  
Device Port  
AP Name  
The device port.  
The name of the access point or bridge connected to the  
router.  
AP IP Address  
Status (Fault)  
The IP address of the access point or bridge connected to  
the router.  
The fault status.  
Click for details. For more information, see Viewing Fault  
Details, page 2-6.  
Step 5  
Step 6  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying Trends  
This window allows you to view trends about the monitored devices in your  
network. You can view, export, and email the reports.  
The frequency with which performance data is aggregated is 3 hours by default.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Group Performance Report: RF Throughput—See Displaying a Group  
Performance Report: RF Utilization, page 4-22.  
Group Performance Report: Number of Associations—See Displaying a  
Group Performance Report: Ethernet Utilization, page 4-23.  
AP and Bridge RF Transmission Statistics—See Displaying an AP and  
Bridge RF Transmission Statistics, page 4-24.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Trends  
AP and Bridge Ethernet Transmission Statistics—See Displaying an AP and  
Bridge Ethernet Transmission Statistics, page 4-25.  
AP and Bridge Performance: Graph—See Displaying an AP and Bridge  
Performance: Graph, page 4-26.  
AP and Bridge Performance: Tabular—See Displaying an AP and Bridge  
Performance: Tabular, page 4-27.  
Displaying a Group Performance Report: RF Utilization  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click the group folder for which you  
want a report. The right pane refreshes.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
From the Report Name list, select Group Performance Report: RF Utilization.  
From the Start Date and End Date lists, select the start date and end date for the  
period of time for which you want trending information.  
Step 5  
Click View. The table is displayed:  
Column  
Description  
AP Name  
IP Address  
Timestamp  
The name of the access point.  
The IP address of the access point.  
The start of the aggregate time period.  
RF Utilization (%) The percentage of radio frequency utilization.  
Number of  
Shows the number of associations with clients.  
Associations  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Trends  
Step 6  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
Step 7  
Step 8  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying a Group Performance Report: Ethernet Utilization  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click the group folder for which you  
want to see a report. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select Group Performance Report: Ethernet  
Utilization.  
From the Start Date and End Date lists, select the start date and end date for the  
period of time for which you want trending information.  
Click View. The table is displayed:  
Column  
Description  
AP Name  
The name of the access point.  
The IP address of the access point.  
The start of the aggregate time period.  
The percentage of Ethernet utilization.  
AP IP Address  
Timestamp  
Ethernet Utilization (%)  
Number of Associations  
Shows the number of associations with  
clients.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Trends  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
Displaying an AP and Bridge RF Transmission Statistics  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder, then select  
the devices for which you want to see a report. The right pane refreshes.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge RF Transmission Statistics.  
From the Start Date and End Date lists, select the start date and end date for the  
period of time for which you want trending information.  
Step 5  
Click View. A graph is displayed:  
Column  
Description  
Transmit Rate  
The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the number of packets transmitted per  
second.  
Receive Rate  
Packet Errors  
The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the number of packets received per  
second.  
The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the number of error packets per number  
of packets.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Trends  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Ethernet Transmission Statistics  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder, then select  
the devices for which you want to see a report. The right pane refreshes.  
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Ethernet Transmission  
Statistics.  
From the Start Date and End Date lists, select the start date and end date for the  
period of time for which you want trending information.  
Click View. A graph is displayed:  
Column  
Description  
Transmit Rate  
The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the number of packets  
transmitted per second.  
Receive Rate  
Packet Errors  
The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the number of packets  
received per second.  
The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the number of error packets  
per number of packets.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Trends  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Performance: Graph  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder you want to  
view. The right pane refreshes.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Performance Graph.  
From the Start Date list, select the start date for the graph, an d from the For a  
period of list, select the number of days.  
Step 5  
Click View. A graph is displayed:  
Column  
Description  
Number of Associations The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the number of client  
associations  
RF Utilization  
The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the percent of radio  
frequency utilization.  
Ethernet Utilization  
The x-axis displays the time intervals.  
The y-axis displays the percent of Ethernet  
utilization.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Displaying Trends  
Displaying an AP and Bridge Performance: Tabular  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left  
pane.  
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder you want to  
view. The right pane refreshes.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Performance: Tabular.  
From the Start Date list, select the start date for the graph, an d from the For a  
period of list, select the number of days.  
Step 5  
Click View. The report is displayed:  
Column  
Description  
IP Address  
Timestamp  
The IP address of the access point or bridge.  
The time the access point was last seen by the  
system.  
Number of Associations The number of client associations.  
RF Utilization  
The amount of radio frequency utilization.  
The amount of Ethernet utilization.  
Ethernet Utilization  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)  
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Exporting a Report  
Exporting a Report  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Click Export. An Export window appears.  
From the Output Format list, select the format in which you want the file exported:  
CSV, PDF, or XML.  
Step 3  
Click Submit. A window opens in the requested format and displays the output.  
Emailing a Report  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Click Email Report. A the right pane refreshes with an Email properties dialog  
box.  
Enter the following:  
Field  
Description  
To  
Enter the email address of the person to whom you want to  
send the report. An entry in this field is required.  
Cc  
Enter email addresses of persons that you want to copy on  
the email.  
Subject  
Enter a subject for the email.  
Attachment Type From the list, select the format in which you would like the  
report sent: CSV, PDF, or XML.  
Message  
Enter any message you would like to send.  
Report Data for  
Last ‘N’ Days  
This entry is applicable for Trends reports only.  
From the list, select the number of days for which you want  
report data emailed.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Scheduling Email Jobs  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Step 5  
To cancel the email, click Cancel.  
To send the email immediately, click Send Now.  
To schedule the email for later:  
a. Click Schedule. The schedule job dialog box appears.  
b. Enter the following:  
Field  
Description  
Job Name  
Enter a name for the job.  
For more information, see Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Start Date  
Start Time  
From the list, select the date you would like to send the  
email.  
From the list, select the time you would like to send the  
email.  
Repeat  
Enable  
Check if you want to set up a scheduled job that  
periodically sends email.  
Every  
From the list, select the period of time you would like the  
email sent.  
Step 6  
Do one of the following:  
Click Cancel to cancel the schedule.  
Click Finish to complete scheduling. You receive a confirmation message  
that your email has been scheduled.  
To view, delete, or edit the scheduled email jobs, see Scheduling Email Jobs,  
page 4-29  
Scheduling Email Jobs  
This window allows you to view information about email jobs you have  
scheduled. It also allows you to delete them and edit them.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Scheduling Email Jobs  
The length of time job data is retained is 30 days by default. To change the default  
setting, see Managing System Parameters, page 5-58.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Reports > Scheduled Email Jobs. The Email Jobs window appears.  
Field  
Description  
Job Name  
The name of the job.  
For more information, see Naming Guidelines,  
page A-1.  
Recurring  
Indicates whether it is a recurring job.  
Indicates when the job runs again.  
Next Schedule  
Step 2  
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
To delete a job, select it, then click Delete Email Job.  
To view an email job, select it, then click View Email Job. (See Viewing Email  
Job Details, page 4-31.)  
Step 5  
To edit a job, select it, then click Edit Email Job. The email appears and allows  
you to change any of the entries. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28 for more  
information.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Scheduling Email Jobs  
Viewing Email Job Details  
The following tables are displayed in a window when you select a job in Reports  
> Scheduled Email Jobs, then click View Email Job.  
Report Properties  
Column  
Description  
User Name  
Report Type  
Report Name  
The name of the user who scheduled the job.  
The report type.  
The report name.  
Email Properties  
Column  
Description  
To  
The username of the person to whom the  
report is being emailed.  
Cc  
The username of the person to whom the  
report is being copied.  
Subject  
Format  
The email subject.  
The format in which the report is being  
emailed.  
Body  
The text entered into the body of the email.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Using Reports  
Scheduling Email Jobs  
Schedule Properties  
Column  
Description  
Email Job Name  
Start Date  
The name of the email job.  
The date the report is emailed.  
Frequency  
The frequency with which the report is to be  
emailed.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
5
Performing Administrative Tasks  
The Administration tab allows you to you perform administrative tasks.  
Note  
Some of the subtabs may not be visible to some users; what you view under  
the Administration tab depends on your login.  
The Administration subtabs have the following functions:  
Discover—Manage devices, configure discovery, specify device credentials,  
import devices, and set up LEAP servers (see Using Discovery and Managing  
Devices, page 5-2).  
Group Management—Place devices in groups for efficient management  
(see Managing Groups, page 5-28).  
Appliance—Manage the Wireless LAN Solution Engine server (see  
Managing the Appliance, page 5-34).  
System Parameters—Configure parameters for reporting performance and  
fault data (see Managing System Parameters, page 5-58).  
User Admin—Manage users and user roles (see Administering Users,  
page 5-60).  
My Profile—Change your password (see Modifying Your Profile,  
page 5-65).  
Connectivity—Test device connectivity and reachability and troubleshoot  
nonresponding devices (see Using Connectivity Tools, page 5-66).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
The Discover window contains the following options:  
Discover—Set up discovery, perform an immediate discovery, and view  
discovery history (see Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2).  
Managed Devices—View newly discovered devices, change device status,  
and view device management history (see Managing Devices, page 5-13).  
Inventory—Run a one-time, immediate inventory to collect information  
from managed devices before the next scheduled inventory (see Running  
Inventory Now, page 5-17)  
Device Credentials—Specify community strings and specify the HTTP  
username and password for access points (see Setting Device Credentials,  
page 5-17).  
Import Devices—Import devices from a file or from a CiscoWorks2000  
server (see Importing Devices, page 5-21).  
Export Devices—Export devices to a CiscoWorks2000 server (see Exporting  
Devices, page 5-24).  
LEAP Server—Add, modify, or delete LEAP servers (see Managing LEAP  
Managing Device Discovery  
The discovery options are:  
Modify Discovery Settings—Set up scheduled discoveries (see Add Seed  
Devices and Schedule Discovery, page 5-10).  
Run Discovery Now—Run a one-time, immediate discovery (see Run  
Discovery History—View discovery details (seeView Discovery History and  
Status, page 5-12).  
Related Topics  
Overview: Discovery, page 5-3  
Set Up Devices, page 5-4  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Overview: Discovery  
You can set up regularly scheduled discoveries and run one-time discoveries.  
Before the WLSE can discover devices:  
You must configure discovery on the WLSE. See Add Seed Devices and  
Schedule Discovery, page 5-10.  
As an alternative to using Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) to run discovery,  
you can import devices from a file or from CiscoWorks2000. See Importing  
Devices, page 5-21.  
Devices must be properly configured for access by the WLSE. See Set Up  
Devices, page 5-4.  
Community strings must be entered on the WLSE. See Specify Community  
Strings, page 5-18).  
Note  
Routers and switches are only discovered if they have properly configured  
access points attached to them.  
Discovery proceeds according to the seed devices and CDP distance that you  
specify. The CDP distance determines the depth of the discovery. With a CDP  
distance of 1, only the immediate neighbors of the seed device are discovered.  
With a CDP distance of 2, devices A and B that are directly connected to the seed  
device are discovered, and the immediate neighbors of A and B are also  
discovered. You should set the CDP distance so that your entire wireless network  
is discovered.  
After devices are discovered, you must move them to the managed state.  
Unmanaged devices do not appear in WLSE displays.  
Related Topic  
Importing Devices, page 5-21  
Managing Devices, page 5-13  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Set Up Devices  
You must set up devices so the WLSE can discover and manage them. This section  
describes both required and optional setup tasks for:  
Access Points and Bridges, page 5-4  
Routers and Switches, page 5-7  
LEAP Servers, page 5-9  
Access Points and Bridges  
Before you begin, Web browsing must be enabled on each access point. If Web  
browsing is not enabled, attach a console to the access point and enable web  
browsing.  
On each access point and bridge, open a web browser session on the device and  
perform the tasks in the following table.  
Tasks  
Procedure  
Notes  
1. Enable Cisco  
Discovery Protocol  
(CDP).  
1. In the Summary Status page, click  
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup  
page appears.  
CDP is required for the WLSE to  
discover devices on the network.  
2. Under Services: Cisco Services, click  
Cisco Discovery Protocol. The CDP  
Setup page appears.  
3. Select Enabled. Click Apply or OK.  
2. Enable SNMP.  
1. In the Summary Status page, click  
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup  
page appears.  
SNMP is required for the WLSE to  
discover and manage the device.  
(Optional) Set the  
location.  
Setting the location enables proper  
grouping of devices into the  
system-defined Location group.  
For more information, see  
2. Under Services, click SNMP. The  
(Optional) Set the  
system name and  
system contact.  
SNMP Setup page appears.  
3. Select Enabled.  
Managing Groups, page 5-28.  
4. Enter a System Name, System  
Setting the system name and  
system location displays this  
information when you display  
device details.  
Location, and System Contact.  
5. Click Apply or OK.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-4  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Tasks  
Procedure  
Notes  
3. Set the community 1. In the Summary Status page, click  
The username of the user with  
Write and SNMP privileges is used  
as the SNMP read/write  
string by creating a  
user with all  
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup  
page appears.  
privileges.  
community string.  
2. Under Services, click Security. The  
(If you already  
Security Setup page appears.  
The Firmware privilege is required  
for configuring devices from the  
WLSE.  
entered an SNMP  
Admin Community  
name, the user created  
has Write, SNMP,  
Firmware, and Admin  
privileges, and the  
User Manager is  
enabled, you do not  
need to create another  
user.)  
3. Click User Information; then click  
Add New User. The User  
Management window appears.  
4. To create an user with SNMP  
read/write privileges, enter a  
username and password and select  
the Write, SNMP, Firmware, and  
Admin capabilities.  
5. Click Apply or OK.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Tasks  
Procedure  
Notes  
4. Add an HTTP user 1. In the Summary Status page, click  
from the WLSE to the access point.  
with the ability to  
modify firmware, and  
enable the User  
Manager.  
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup  
page appears.  
All access points must be  
2. Click Security. The Security Setup configured with the same HTTP  
page appears.  
user and password. You also enter  
this user and password on the  
WLSE (see Specify the HTTP  
Username and Password,  
page 5-20).  
You can use the same  
user that you created  
in Task 3, if the user  
has firmware  
3. Click User Information; then click  
Add New User. The User  
Management window appears.  
4. Enter a username and password and  
select Firmware; then click Apply.  
privileges.  
5. Navigate back to the Security Setup  
page and click User Manager. The  
User Manager Setup window  
appears.  
6. Select Enabled; then click Apply or  
OK.  
5. Set up TFTP as the 1. In the Summary Status page, click  
TFTP is used for transferring  
configuration changes to access  
points.  
transfer protocol  
between the WLSE  
and access points.  
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup  
page appears.  
2. Under Services, click FTP. The FTP  
Setup page appears.  
3. Use the pulldown menu to select  
TFTP as the file transfer protocol.  
4. In the Default File Server text box,  
enter the IP address of the WLSE.  
5. Click Apply or OK.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-6  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Routers and Switches  
Note  
Only routers and switches that have properly configured access points or  
bridges attached to them will be discovered.  
On each router and switch, configure the following:  
Task  
Procedure  
Notes  
1. Enable CDP  
and verify that  
access points and  
bridges are  
visible from the  
router or switch.  
1. Enter enable mode.  
CDP is required for the  
WLSE to discover the  
device.  
2. Verify that CDP is running on the switch or  
router:  
On IOS-based devices, use the show cdp run  
command.  
On Hybrid OS-based Catalyst switches, use the  
show cdp command  
3. If CDP is not running, use the set cdp enable  
command to enable CDP.  
4. To verify that access points or bridges are  
visible in the device’s CDP table, use the show  
cdp neighbors command.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-7  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Task  
Procedure  
Notes  
2. Enable SNMP On IOS-based devices, enter configuration mode and SNMP is required for the  
and set up  
community  
strings.  
use the snmp community community_string ro  
command.  
WLSE to discover and  
manage the device.  
On Hybrid OS-based Catalyst devices, enter enable  
mode and use the set snmp community read-only  
community_string command.  
3. (Optional) Set On IOS-based devices, enter configuration mode and These variables make the  
the system name, use the following commands.  
contact, and  
device more manageable.  
The location variable  
enables proper grouping of  
devices into the  
system-defined Location  
group. For more information  
about groups, see Managing  
Groups, page 5-28.  
To set the system name, use the hostname name  
location  
variables.  
command.  
To set the system contact, use the snmp contact  
contact command.  
To set the location, use the snmp location  
location command.  
The system name, system  
contact, and location will  
appear in the device detail  
displays.  
On Hybrid OS-based Catalyst switches, enter enable  
mode and use the following commands:  
To set the system name, use the set system  
name name command.  
To set the system contact, use the set system  
contact contact command.  
To set the location, use the set system location  
location command.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-8  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
LEAP Servers  
The WLSE can monitor a LEAP server (CiscoSecure ACS Server) that provides  
LEAP services to a wireless LAN using synthetic transactions.  
Note  
Each LEAP server must be specified on the WLSE. For more information, see  
Managing LEAP Servers, page 5-26.  
Procedure  
To set up a LEAP server and add the WLSE as a Network Access Server (NAS)  
on the LEAP server:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Log into the CiscoSecure ACS Server.  
Click User Setup on the left side of the initial page. The User Setup page appears.  
In the User text box, enter the name of the user that the WLSE will use for  
synthetic transactions.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Click Add/Edit; then enter the appropriate information for the user, including the  
password. Click Submit.  
Click Network Configuration on the left side of the page. The Network  
Configuration screen appears.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
Click Add Entry. The Add Access Server screen appears.  
Enter the WLSE information in the following text boxes:  
Network Access Server Hostname  
Network Access Server IP  
Key (the shared key)  
Step 8  
Step 9  
Select RADIUS (Cisco Aironet) from the Authenticate Using list.  
Click Submit or Submit+Restart. A restart is required for the changes to take  
effect.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Add Seed Devices and Schedule Discovery  
Neighbors of seed devices are discovered by examining the contents of CDP  
tables. Before discovery can proceed, you must specify at least one seed device.  
Any supported device can function as a seed.  
You may want to specify multiple seed devices to:  
Shorten the discovery time.  
Discover “disconnected” networks; that is, discover devices across links on  
which CDP is disabled or discover devices outside the firewall.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Modify Discovery Settings.  
To delete a seed device, select the IP address from the Seed Values list and click  
Delete.  
Step 3  
To add a seed device, enter its IP address in the Seed Values text box and click >>.  
Note  
Before you can modify the discovery schedule, you must have at least  
one seed device in the Seed Values list.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Repeat step 3 to add more seed devices.  
Select the CDP distance from the list. Set CDP distance appropriately to discover  
the entire wireless network; a CDP distance of 1 only discovers the immediate  
neighbors of the seed devices.  
Note  
Routers and switches that do not have access points attached to them  
are used when computing CDP distance. However, such devices will  
not appear in the discovered devices list.  
Step 6  
To schedule discovery, click Next: Modify Schedule. The Modify Discovery  
Schedule dialog box appears.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Select the State Date and Start Time from the pulldown lists.  
To repeat discovery at specified intervals, click Enable. Then enter a number  
and select the interval from the Every list.  
Step 7  
Step 8  
Click Next. The CDP Discovery - Summary dialog box appears.  
Click Finish to submit your settings or Back to make changes in your settings.  
Run Discovery Now  
This option allows you to run an immediate one-time discovery.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Run Discovery Now. The  
Discovery - Seeds dialog box appears.  
If necessary, add seed devices:  
Note  
If you add seed devices in the Discovery - Seeds dialog box, they will  
not be saved. Any seed devices added here are used for this one-time  
discovery only.  
a. Enter the seed device’s IP address in the Add Seed Value text box and  
click >>.  
b. Set the CDP distance by selecting a number from the list.  
Click Run Now. The Discovery - Summary dialog box appears.  
Step 3  
Click Back if you want to make changes.  
Click Finish to run the discovery. The discovery will begin within 2 minutes.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
View Discovery History and Status  
The Discovery History table shows completed and scheduled discovery jobs.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Discovery History. The  
Discovery History table appears:  
Field  
Description  
Discovery Name  
The job name. The scheduled discovery is called  
CDPDiscovery. One-time discoveries and discoveries  
initiated by device imports are called  
CDPDiscovery_type_number; for example,  
CDPDiscovery_Import_Devices_4.  
Recurring  
Whether the job is recurring.  
The next time the job will run.  
Schedule Time  
Note  
If the Discovery History table grows too large, you can reset the Job  
History Truncation Interval parameter in Administration > System  
Parameters so that the table is truncated more often. For more  
information on this parameter, see Managing System Parameters,  
page 5-58.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
From the Discovery State list, select the discoveries you want to view: scheduled  
discoveries, discoveries that are currently running, or all discoveries. The  
Discovery History table is displayed.  
To view more information about a discovery in the Discovery History table, select  
the radio button and click Discovery Run Detail. This Discovery Run Details  
window appears, showing the Discovery Start and End times.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Step 4  
To view the detailed log for a particular discovery run, select the run and click  
Discovery Run Log. The following information is displayed in the Discovery  
Run Log:  
The seed devices used.  
The CDP distance configured for the seed devices.  
When the discovery started and ended (displayed as UTC).  
The number of devices that were discovered or rediscovered.  
A list of the devices that were discovered. Devices listed as being updated  
were already discovered in a previous discovery run.  
A list of devices that were previously discovered but are now unreachable.  
Devices that are unreachable because CDP is not enabled on the device or  
SNMP is not configured on the device.  
Step 5  
To sort table data, click on the column heading by which you want to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
Managing Devices  
Before you can view devices or perform any operations on them, you must move  
the devices to the managed state. The device management options are:  
Manage/Unmanage—View newly discovered devices, change device  
management status, or delete devices (see Manage Devices, page 5-13).  
Device History—View the management history of each discovered device  
(see View Device Management History, page 5-16).  
Manage Devices  
You can use this option to change a device’s management status or delete a  
device.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Discover > Managed Devices > Manage/Unmanage.  
The device selector is displayed, showing:  
Newly discovered devices (New folder). All new devices are also listed in the  
Unmanaged folder.  
Managed devices (Managed folder)  
Unmanaged devices (Unmanaged folder).  
Step 2  
Step 3  
To view the contents of a folder, expand the folder.  
To modify the status of the devices in a folder, click the folder name. The Group  
Status pane appears. Select one or more devices from the list and click Manage  
or Unmanage in the Group Change Status window. Devices are moved into the  
Managed or Unmanaged folders.  
You must move newly discovered devices to the managed state. Only managed  
devices appear in WLSE displays.  
Note  
You can only manage a total of 525 access points and wireless bridges.  
After you have placed 500 of these devices into the Managed folder,  
warning messages are displayed when you place more devices in the  
folder. After the 525 limit is reached, no more devices can be placed  
in the Managed folder. Discovery of access points and wireless  
bridges is not limited to 525 devices.  
Step 4  
After you move devices to the managed state, it is recommended that you run  
inventory. This ensures that devices appear in displays such as reports and  
system-defined groups without waiting for the next inventory cycle. To run  
inventory:  
a. Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Inventory.  
b. Click Run Inventory.  
For more information, see Running Inventory Now, page 5-17.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Step 5  
To view details about a device, select the device from the device selector. The  
Device Details pane appears. You can change the device’s status by using the  
Manage and Unmanage buttons.  
Note  
Some details may not be displayed if the corresponding parameters are  
not set on the device; for example, Location and Contact.  
The details in the Device Details pane are:  
Field  
Description  
Device Name  
Description  
Version  
Hostname or IP address.  
Detailed device description.  
Software version installed on the device.  
Device type.  
Device Family  
SysName  
The system name.  
SysObjectId  
Location  
Unique identifier that identifies the device type.  
Where the device is located.  
Device IP address.  
IP Address  
Subnet  
Subnet in which the device is located.  
The network segment in which the device is located.  
The person to contact for this device.  
Network Segment  
Contact  
Step 6  
To delete a device, select the device from the device selector or dialog box and  
click Delete.  
The device will be removed from the device selector and from all tables  
(including trend tables).  
Related Topics  
Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
View Device Management History  
The Historical Operations table shows information on all changes in device state  
(from unmanaged to managed or vice versa).  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
To view the Historical Operations table, select Administration > Discover >  
Managed Devices > Device History. The following information is displayed:  
Field  
Description  
Timestamp  
Date and time when the state change occurred.  
Device Name The device’s hostname.  
IP Address  
State  
The device’s IP address.  
The device’s state:  
New—Device was discovered but has not been moved to  
the managed or unmanaged state.  
Managed—Device has been moved to the managed state.  
Unmanaged—Device is unmanaged.  
Step 2  
To sort table data, click on the column heading by which you want to sort the data:  
A triangle indicates ascending order.  
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.  
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Running Inventory Now  
By default, the WLSE collects device configuration information every hour. You  
can use this option to run a one-time, immediate inventory. Running an immediate  
inventory after you move devices to the managed state is recommended so you can  
see the devices in displays such as reports and system-defined groups, without  
waiting for the next scheduled inventory cycle.  
To change the scheduled inventory interval, you can reset the Inventory Polling  
Interval parameter. See Managing System Parameters, page 5-58.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Inventory.  
Click Run Inventory. The inventory job will start within 2 minutes. A  
confirmation message appears, managed devices are polled, and configuration  
information is collected. WLSE displays will be updated accordingly.  
If a scheduled inventory or previous immediate inventory is already running, a  
message appears. You should wait for the running inventory to complete before  
starting another immediate inventory.  
This option allows you specify device community strings and HTTP credentials.  
SNMP Communities—Specify community strings for managed devices. See  
Specify Community Strings, page 5-18.  
HTTP User/Password—Specify the HTTP username and password for  
configuring access points. See Specify the HTTP Username and Password,  
page 5-20.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Specify Community Strings  
The Wireless LAN Solution Engine uses a device’s read-only community string  
for discovery and the read/write community string to configure the device. If  
community strings are not entered correctly, the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
cannot communicate with the device. Both read-only and read/write community  
strings are required.  
The default community string is public for both the read-only string and the  
read-write string. If the community strings on your devices differ from the  
defaults, you must specify the community strings before the discovery process can  
begin and before you can configure the devices.  
Note  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Select Administration > Discover > Device Credentials > SNMP  
Communities. The Bulk SNMP Settings dialog box appears.  
This dialog box contains a default entry that covers all devices, provided device  
community strings are set to the default (public).  
Add new entries or modify existing entries in the text box using the following  
syntax:  
target:read_community::timeout:retries:::write_community  
Note  
You must enter the correct number of colons between variables.  
Otherwise, the community strings cannot be read.  
Information about the variables follows. For more details, see Community String  
Guidelines, page 5-20.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Variable  
Description  
Notes  
target  
A device or range of devices that If you do not specify a target, the default  
use these community strings.  
community strings apply to all devices in the  
network.  
read_community  
timeout  
A password allowing read-only You must specify a read community string.  
access to the target devices. Otherwise, the default value of public is used.  
The length of time (seconds) the The default is 10 seconds. If you increase the  
server waits for a response from timeout period, discovery could take  
the device before performing the significantly longer to complete. The  
first retry.  
minimum value is one and the maximum  
value is 60.  
retries  
The number of times the server The default is one retry. If you increase the  
attempts to communicate with number of retries, discovery takes  
the device before declaring that significantly longer to complete. The default  
the device has timed out.  
retry policy doubles the previous timeout  
value for retry.  
write_community  
The password that allows write You must specify the write community string.  
access to the target devices. Otherwise, the default value of public is used.  
Step 3  
Select Reverse DNS Lookup if DNS is configured on the device.  
If DNS Lookup fails, the device IP address will be used; however, discovery  
will take longer.  
If DNS Lookup succeeds, the WLSE displays will show the device’s  
hostname instead of the IP address in device name fields.  
Step 4  
Click Save to apply your changes.  
Related Topic  
Community String Guidelines, page 5-20  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-19  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Community String Guidelines  
Use these guidelines when adding or modifying community strings:  
You can assign community strings to any of the following:  
Complete IP address; for example, 172.20.4.9  
Any wild cards (based on IP addresses); for example:  
*.*.*.*  
172.*.*.*  
Address ranges, which can include wild cards; for example:  
27.20.[4-55].*  
172.[21-30].[44-88].*  
172.*.*.[121-255]  
You can add a combination of general and specific entries, but the Wireless  
LAN Solution Engine reads the community strings from most specific to least  
specific.  
If you enter duplicate community strings for a device, the most specific  
community string is used.  
A # sign as the first character on a line indicates a comment.  
All printable characters, except for colons (:), are allowed in community  
strings.  
Spaces are not allowed in community strings.  
Specify the HTTP Username and Password  
The HTTP username and password are required for downloading configuration  
files to access points. The password must be set on each access point. For more  
information, see Set Up Devices, page 5-4.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Discover > Device Credentials > HTTP  
User/Password.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Enter a username or modify the username in the User field.  
Enter or modify the password in the Confirm Password field.  
Click Save.  
Related Topic  
Chapter 3, “Configuring Devices”  
Importing Devices  
Instead of running discovery on the WLSE, you can import devices:  
From CiscoWorks2000 Resource Manager Essentials (see Import Devices  
from CiscoWorks2000, page 5-23).  
A one-time discovery job starts within 2 minutes after you import devices. All  
WLSE-supported devices in the file are used as seed devices with a CDP distance  
of 1. These devices are not added to the list of available seed devices in the  
Discovery - Configuring Seeds dialog box, but they do appear in the Discovery  
Run Log. See Add Seed Devices and Schedule Discovery, page 5-10 and View  
Discovery History and Status, page 5-12.  
Devices not supported by the WLSE are ignored.  
You can choose to discover some devices and import others.  
The following information is imported:  
IP addresses are accepted, and hostnames are resolved to obtain the IP  
address. Hostnames that cannot be resolved are ignored.  
Read-only and read/write community strings are appended to the end of the  
Bulk SNMP Settings table (Administration > Discover > Device  
Credentials). See Setting Device Credentials, page 5-17.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Note  
Imported credentials are not matched with existing entries that  
contain wildcards or ranges.  
Import Devices from a File  
You can import devices from a file that contains device information in the CSV  
format. You can create a CSV file by exporting devices from CiscoWorks2000 or  
by creating the file with a text editor. You can view a sample CSV file in the dialog  
box for importing files.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Discover > Import Devices > From File. The Import  
Devices from File dialog box appears.  
To see a sample file, click See Sample CSV File.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
You can enter a pathname for the file in the Choose File dialog box or click  
Browse to find the file in the client directory structure.  
2 minutes.  
To verify the discovery, see View Discovery History and Status, page 5-12.  
Related Topics  
Import Devices from CiscoWorks2000, page 5-23  
Add Seed Devices and Schedule Discovery, page 5-10  
Setting Device Credentials, page 5-17  
View Discovery History and Status, page 5-12  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Import Devices from CiscoWorks2000  
You can import devices directly from CiscoWorks2000 by connecting to a  
CiscoWorks2000 server.  
The time required to import devices depends on the response from the  
CiscoWorks2000 server and the number of devices imported. The following  
procedure explains how to check the status of the operation.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Discover > Import Devices > From CiscoWorks2000.  
Enter the following information. All fields are required; if any are left blank, the  
display will clear.  
The CiscoWorks2000 server IP address.  
The port number at which the CiscoWorks2000 server listens for HTTP  
requests. You may need to contact the administrator of the CiscoWorks2000  
server to obtain this information.  
The username and password of any user who has the authority to export and  
import device credentials on the CiscoWorks2000 server.  
Click Import. After devices are imported, a one-time discovery begins.  
Step 3  
To see the Import Status log, click Status. The CiscoWorks2000 Import Status  
window appears. To refresh the status display, click Refresh.  
If the Last Status button is displayed in place of the Status button, you can  
review the results of a previous import.  
If the import fails because you entered the wrong data in the Import dialog  
box, one of the following error messages is included in the Import Status log:  
The following message means that either the host or the port specified in  
the WLSE import dialog was wrong:  
Error: Could not connect to CiscoWorks2000 server:ip_address on  
port:port_number.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
The following message means that either the user or password specified  
in the WLSE import dialog was wrong:  
Error: Connected to CiscoWorks2000 server:ip_address on  
port:port_number successfully, but server returned error after  
connection.  
Run Log. See View Discovery History and Status, page 5-12.  
Related Topics  
Import Devices from a File, page 5-22  
Add Seed Devices and Schedule Discovery, page 5-10  
Exporting Devices  
You can export all WLSE-discovered devices to a CiscoWorks2000 server  
running Resource Manager Essentials. The information exported consists of the  
device IP addresses and their credentials.  
The time required to export devices depends on the number of devices exported  
and the response from the CiscoWorks2000 server. The following procedure  
explains how to check the status of the operation.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Discover > Export Devices > To CiscoWorks2000.  
Enter the following information:  
The CiscoWorks2000 server IP address.  
The CiscoWorks2000 server port number. You may need to contact the  
administrator of the CiscoWorks2000 server.  
The username and password of any user who has the authority to export and  
import device credentials on the CiscoWorks2000 server.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Click Export.  
The Export to CiscoWorks2000 Started window appears.  
To see the export status log, click Status. The CiscoWorks2000 Export Status  
window appears. To refresh the status display, click Refresh.  
If the Last Status button is displayed in place of the Status button, you can review  
the results of a previous export.  
The following information is included in the export status log:  
Type of Information Description  
Device  
Name of the device, device status, and device status details.  
information  
The string !{[NO VALUE]}! does not indicate an error; it  
means information was not available to the  
CiscoWorks2000 server while it was sending a response to  
the WLSE.  
Error messages  
The following message means that either the host or the  
port specified in the WLSE export dialog was wrong:  
Error: Could not connect to CiscoWorks2000  
server:ip_address on port:port_number.  
The following message means that either the user or  
password specified in the WLSE export dialog was wrong:  
Error: Connected to CiscoWorks2000 server:ip_address on  
port:port_number successfully, but server returned error  
after connection.  
After you export devices, you can view the exported devices in CiscoWorks2000  
Resource Manager Essentials (see the Resource Manager Essentials online help  
for details).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Managing LEAP Servers  
This window allows you to manage LEAP servers (CiscoSecure ACS Servers).  
LEAP servers monitor the authentication servers, detecting performance  
problems and ensuring availability. LEAP servers must be configured for  
synthetic transactions.  
After you save LEAP server credentials, the WLSE automatically performs  
periodic LEAP logins to monitor the response time and availability of LEAP  
servers. To change the default polling interval and fault thresholds, select Faults  
> Specify Fault Thresholds > LEAP > Response Time.  
A LEAP server must be set up for LEAP logins. For information on setting up  
LEAP servers, see Set Up Devices, page 5-4.  
Related Topics  
Setting LEAP Server Response Time, page 2-12  
Displaying Faults, page 2-1  
Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7  
Specifying Policies, page 2-13  
Forwarding Faults, page 2-15  
Add a LEAP Server  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Discover > LEAP SERVER > Add Server. The LEAP  
Server: Add Server dialog box appears.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Discovery and Managing Devices  
Step 2  
Complete the following:  
Text Box  
Description  
Server Name  
Server Port  
Enter the name of the server.  
Enter the number of the port the server uses for  
authentication.  
Username  
Password  
Secret  
Enter the LEAP username.  
Enter the LEAP password.  
Enter the shared secret key.  
Step 3  
Click Submit to apply your settings, or Reset to apply the default values.  
Modify a LEAP Server  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Discover > LEAP Server > Modify Server. The LEAP  
Server: Modify Server dialog box appears.  
Modify attributes as desired:  
Text Box  
Description  
Server Name  
Server Port  
Username  
Password  
Secret  
From the list, select the server name you want to modify.  
Modify the port number used for authentication.  
Change the LEAP server name.  
Change the LEAP password  
Change the shared secret.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing Groups  
Step 3  
Click Submit to apply your settings, or Reset to apply the default values.  
Remove a LEAP Server  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Discover > LEAP Server > Remove Server. The LEAP  
Server: Remove Server dialog box appears.  
From the list, select the server you want to remove, then click Submit.  
Managing Groups  
This window contains a group selector and a dialog box for creating, editing, and  
deleting groups.  
Related Topics  
Overview: Groups, page 5-28  
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Groups, page 5-29  
Overview: Groups  
The Group Management window allows you to view the existing device groups  
and categorize devices into named groups so that you can perform management  
tasks on a group of devices as a single operation.  
A group is a named entity consisting of a set of devices, a set of groups, or a  
combination of devices and groups. A group can consist of both user-defined  
groups and system-defined groups.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing Groups  
There are five folders containing system-defined groups. You cannot edit or delete  
a system-defined group. The system defined groups are automatically populated  
using information read from the devices during discovery and inventory  
collection. Any changes on devices are reflected in the system-defined groups  
only after the next discovery or inventory collection has completed. The  
system-defined groups and folders are:  
Device Type folder—Contains groups for 1200 APs, 340 APs, 350 APs, 350  
Bridges, Routers, and Switches.  
Location folder—Contains groups based on the locations of the devices. To  
enable creation of system-defined location groups, you must configure a  
parameter on the device that identifies the device location. See Set Up  
Devices, page 5-4 for information on setting location. The null location group  
contains all devices that are not configured with their location information.  
SSID folder—Contains a group for each radio service set ID (SSID)  
configured on access points. For information on configuring the SSID, see Set  
Subnet folder—Contains a group for each subnet configured in the network.  
Software Version folder—Contains a group for each software version  
detected on the devices.  
Related Topics  
Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2  
Running Inventory Now, page 5-17  
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Groups  
You can create groups and edit or delete groups that were created by users. The  
system-defined groups cannot be edited or deleted.  
Use the options in the Group Management window to:  
Add a Group, page 5-30  
Edit a Group, page 5-32  
Delete a Group, page 5-33  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-29  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing Groups  
To view the devices in a group, select Administration > Group Management.  
Click a group folder in the group selector in the left pane. The group name,  
Add a Group  
You can add groups by:  
Creating a New Group, page 5-30  
Copying an Existing Group, page 5-31  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Creating a New Group  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Group Management. The group selector pane and  
group window are displayed.  
The group selector lists all the current groups, both system-defined groups and  
user-defined groups. The number after a group name or folder shows how many  
devices are in the group or how many groups are in the folder. Every managed  
device appears in one or more of the system-defined groups, and may also appear  
in user-defined groups.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
To create a new group, click Create New. The Create Group dialog appears.  
Enter a name in the Name text box. Enter a description in the Description text box  
(optional).  
For information about the characters allowed in group names and descriptions, see  
Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
From the group selector in the left pane, select a group that contains devices you  
want to add to your new group. Devices in that group are added to the All  
Available Devices list in the Create Group dialog.  
To add devices to the new group, select the group or individual devices from the  
All Available Devices list and click Add >>. Devices are moved to the Devices in  
Group list.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing Groups  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To add more devices to the new group, repeat Steps 4 and 5.  
To remove devices from the group, select them from the Devices in Group list and  
click Remove.  
Step 8  
To save the group, click Save. The new group is displayed and added to the end  
of the group selector list. To cancel the group creation and discard your changes,  
click Cancel.  
Copying an Existing Group  
Use this procedure to create a new group by copying an existing group.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Group Management. The group selector pane and  
group dialog box are displayed.  
The group selector lists all the current groups, both system-defined groups and  
user-defined groups. The number after a group name or folder show how many  
devices are in the group or how many groups are in the folder. Every discovered  
and managed device appears in one or more of the system-defined groups, and  
may also appear in user-defined groups.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
To copy an existing group, select the group and click Copy. The Copy Group  
dialog appears. The devices in the group are placed in the Devices in Group list.  
Edit the name, if desired. Add a description in the Description text box (optional).  
For information about the characters allowed in group names and descriptions, see  
Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
To add more devices to the group, select another existing group. Devices in that  
group are added to the All Available Devices list in the Create Group dialog.  
Select the group or individual devices from the All Available Devices list and  
click Add >>.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
To add more devices, repeat Steps 4 and 5.  
To remove devices from the group, select them from the Devices in Group list and  
click Remove.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing Groups  
Step 8  
To save the group, click Save. The new group is displayed and added to the end  
of the group selector list. To cancel the group creation and discard your changes,  
click Cancel.  
Related Topics  
Edit a Group, page 5-32  
Delete a Group, page 5-33  
Overview: Groups, page 5-28  
Edit a Group  
You can edit user-defined groups, but system-defined groups cannot be edited.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Administration > Group Management. The group selector pane and  
Group dialog box appear.  
Select a group to edit from the group selector in the left pane and click Edit. The  
Edit Group dialog appears.  
Change the Name or Description by editing the text in the text boxes.  
For information about the characters allowed in group names and descriptions, see  
Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Step 4  
To add devices to the group, select a group from the group selector. The devices  
in the group appear in the All Available Devices list. Select the group or individual  
devices from the list and click Add. Devices are placed in the Devices in Group  
list.  
Step 5  
Step 6  
To add more devices, repeat Step 4.  
To delete devices from the group, select one or more devices from the Devices in  
the Group list and click Remove.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing Groups  
Step 7  
To save your changes, click Save. The edited group is displayed. To discard your  
changes, click Cancel.  
Related Topics  
Add a Group, page 5-30  
Delete a Group, page 5-33  
Overview: Groups, page 5-28  
Delete a Group  
You can delete user-defined groups, but you cannot delete system-defined groups.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Group Management. The group selector appears in the  
left pane and the Group window appears.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select the group from the group selector list. The group is displayed.  
Click Delete.  
Related Topic  
Overview: Groups, page 5-28  
Edit a Group, page 5-32  
Add a Group, page 5-30  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-33  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Managing the Appliance  
The Appliance window contains the following options:  
Status—Gather and view WLSE statistics and restart the machine (see  
Viewing WLSE Status, page 5-34).  
Software—Update, reinstall, view status, and define the repository for the  
WLSE software (see Managing the Software, page 5-37).  
Security—Manage the WLSE security features, such as telnet, SSL,  
Backup and Restore—Configure backup location, backup data, and restore  
data (see Backing Up and Restoring Data, page 5-50).  
Diagnostics—Troubleshoot, run self-tests, view process status (see Using  
Diagnostics, page 5-52).  
Splash Screen—Customize the splash screen message (see Setting Up the  
Splash Screen Message, page 5-57).  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use these options.  
Viewing WLSE Status  
The Status options include:  
Log file statistics (see Viewing Log File Reports, page 5-35).  
Restart (see Restarting the Wireless LAN Solution Engine, page 5-36).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Viewing Log File Reports  
This option allows you to gather and view file system statistics.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Appliance > Status > View Log File. The Log File  
Utilities dialog box appears with the following information:  
Field  
Description  
Log file  
Name of the log file displayed.  
Location of log file.  
Size of file.  
Directory  
File Size  
Size Limit  
File Size Utilization %  
Recommended maximum file size.  
Percentage of the maximum size  
(500MB) being used.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
To see log file details, click the name of the log file. A window appears with log  
file information.  
To search for specific data within the log files, click the check boxes of the log  
files you want to search, and enter a keyword into the Keyword text box. Click  
Case Sensitive if you want your search to be case sensitive, then click Search. A  
window displays the results of the search.  
Log Files Displayed  
Log File  
Content  
access_log  
daemons.log  
dmgtd.log  
error_log  
Web server user access log.  
Log file for logging messages that dmgtd does not log.  
Process Management daemon log file.  
Web server error log.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Log File  
Content  
faults.log  
Log for device fault information.  
Software package installation log.  
Log for all scheduled tasks.  
install.log  
jobvm.log  
mfgtest.log  
mod_jk.log  
snmpd.log  
ssl_request_log  
tomcat.log  
Log for the manufacturing test.  
Message log for hook between Tomcat and Apache.  
SNMP agent log file.  
Log for secure socket layer web server events for https.  
Java servlet messages.  
Restarting the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
This option allows you to restart the WLSE.  
After the Wireless LAN Solution Engine restarts, discovery (see Managing  
Device Discovery, page 5-2) will begin immediately, the performance thresholds  
will resume collecting, the views will update, and all other functions will resume.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Appliance > Status > Restart. The Restart System  
screen appears.  
Click OK to restart the Wireless LAN Solution Engine.  
Note  
If you need to perform a manual soft restart (for example, when  
modifying a network interface) you can use the CLI commands. (Refer  
to User Guide for the CiscoWorks1105 Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine—From the Online Help, click View PDF.)  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Managing the Software  
The Software options include:  
Status—Currently installed software information, such as software  
description, installation date, and installation status (see Viewing Software  
Status, page 5-37).  
Define Repository—Specify the repository location. The repository provides  
software update services to the WLSE (see Defining the Repository,  
page 5-38).  
Software Updates—Select and install a software update from the repository.  
You must specify the repository before updating software so the Wireless  
LAN Solution Engine can locate the software updates (see Installing  
Software Updates, page 5-41).  
Browse Repository—Browse the available complete images and software  
upgrades on the repository (see Browsing the Repository, page 5-43).  
Software Update History— Information about current and previous  
versions of installed software, including version number, install date, and  
installation status (see Viewing Software Update History, page 5-44).  
Viewing Software Status  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Status. The Software Status  
window appears with the Installed Software table, which contains the following  
information about all the software currently installed on the Wireless LAN  
Solution Engine:  
Field  
Description  
Software Name  
Installation Date  
Status  
Brief description of the software.  
Date and time (UTC) the software was installed.  
Status of the installation.  
Details  
Detailed install log for this software.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
The Last Installation Information table displays the following about the most  
recent software installation:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Brief description of the software.  
Status of the installation.  
Detailed install log for this software.  
Installation Status  
Log File  
Step 2  
The install log for the selected installation opens. The information about the latest  
software installed is displayed.  
Related Topics  
Viewing Software Update History, page 5-44  
Installing Software Updates, page 5-41  
Managing the Software, page 5-37  
Defining the Repository  
The repository warehouses the available software updates for the WLSE. The  
repository can be either local (on the Wireless LAN Solution Engine), or remote  
(on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 server). The default is a local repository.  
By defining the repository, you are telling the WLSE where to look for available  
software updates. You can download software from the repository and install it on  
the Wireless LAN Solution Engine, and you can browse the available software  
versions on the repository.  
However, before you can define the repository using the GUI, you must first  
create the repository:  
To create a local repository, see Creating a Local Repository, page 5-39.  
To create a remote repository, see Creating a Remote Repository, page 5-40.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Define Repository. The  
Define Repository dialog box appears.  
To define or redefine the repository, complete the following:  
Text Box  
Description  
Host Name  
The hostname or IP address of the repository. For the local  
repository, enter localhost.  
Port Number  
Description  
The port number used by the software on the repository.  
The default port number for the local repository is 9851.  
A description of the repository. This text box is optional;  
you can enter any description.  
Step 3  
Click Connect to Repository to verify that the hostname and port number you  
entered are correct. If the data is incorrect, an error message appears.  
Related Topics  
Installing Software Updates, page 5-41  
Browsing the Repository, page 5-43  
Managing the Software, page 5-37  
Creating a Local Repository  
The repository warehouses the available software updates for the Wireless LAN  
Solution Engine. A single Wireless LAN Solution Engine can serve as the  
repository for itself and multiple other Wireless LAN Solution Engines.  
To create a local repository, configure the repository using the CLI.  
Note  
To use the local repository, you must be downloading software updates from  
an FTP site.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
For more information, see Installing and Configuring the Cisco 1105 Wireless  
LAN Solution Engine, “Updating your Wireless LAN Solution Engine” section.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Open a CLI window to the Wireless LAN Solution Engine.  
Specify the source of the software updates. Use the following CLI command:  
repository source ftp://hostname/path  
The FTP site is the source for downloading software updates.  
Find the software you want on the FTP site.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Download the software you want from the FTP site to the repository using the  
following command:  
repository add package  
Creating a Remote Repository  
The repository warehouses the available software updates for the Wireless LAN  
Solution Engine. A remote repository can serve as the repository for one or more  
as the remote repository for other Wireless LAN Solution Engines, or the remote  
repository can be a Windows NT or Windows 2000 server. (A remote repository  
created on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 server will be temporary. It will not  
exist after the server reboots.)  
Note  
If you are using a Wireless LAN Solution Engine as a remote repository, see  
Creating a Local Repository, page 5-39.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Download the ZIP file containing the update. The latest updates can be found at  
ftp.cisco.com.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Extract the file to any empty directory. For example, extract the file to  
C:\hse\hse_repository.  
Open a command window and enter the following command:  
subst <drive2:><drive1:>\<path>  
Note  
Drive2 is a virtual drive. It will be removed after rebooting the  
Windows 2000 or Windows NT machine.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Open <drive2:>.  
If Autoplay is enabled, the autorun.bat file will automatically run. If it does not,  
double-click it. A browser window opens, displaying the Appliance Update  
screen.  
Step 6  
Enter the hostname or IP address of the appliance.  
The remote repository is now on the Windows NT or Windows 2000 server. To  
install software updates from this repository, see Installing Software Updates,  
page 5-41.  
Related Topic  
Creating a Local Repository, page 5-39  
Installing Software Updates  
Note  
When you update or reinstall software, the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
stops and restarts. Therefore, you cannot access the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine during a software update, and you must log in again after updating  
software.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Install Software Updates.  
The Install Software Updates window opens and displays information about the  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine, the currently defined repository, and the  
compatible software available for updating.  
Select a software version from the Compatible Updates table, Compatible  
Reinstallations table, or Complete Images table.  
These tables display the following information about the software you can install.  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Software identifier.  
Version  
Summary  
Release Date  
Details  
Version number of the software.  
Brief description of the software.  
Release date of the software.  
Detailed description of the software.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Step 6  
To view details about any of the listed software, click README in the Details  
field.  
To begin the installation, make a selection from the Compatible Updates table,  
Compatible Reinstallations table, or Complete Images table.  
To install the selected software, click Install. The Install Software Updates  
window opens.  
Click Confirm to continue the installation. Click Cancel to cancel the  
installation.  
When the installation is complete, the WLSE will be unavailable for a few  
minutes while it restarts. The Login screen will appear when the update is  
complete.  
You can view details of the installation after the installation is complete  
(Software>Status>View Log).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Related Topics  
Defining the Repository, page 5-38  
Viewing Software Status, page 5-37  
Viewing Software Update History, page 5-44  
Browsing the Repository, page 5-43  
Managing the Software, page 5-37  
Browsing the Repository  
You can browse the available complete images and software upgrades on the  
repository using this option.  
Note  
A repository must be defined in order to browse software. To define the  
repository, see Defining the Repository, page 5-38.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Browse Repository. The  
Browse Repository dialog box appears.  
To view detailed information about a complete image or update, click README  
in the Complete Images table or Updates table. These tables display the following  
about all the software available on the repository:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Version  
Software identifier.  
Version number of the software.  
Appliance Type  
Release Date  
Summary  
The appliance type that the software is designed for.  
Release date of the software.  
Brief description of the software.  
Detailed description of the software. Click README to display details.  
Details  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Related Topics  
Installing Software Updates, page 5-41  
Managing the Software, page 5-37  
Viewing Software Update History  
This window shows only the update history, not a history of installed images. If  
you install a complete new image, the previous update history will be erased.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Software Update History.  
The Software Update History window displays the following:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Software identifier.  
Version  
Summary  
Install Date  
Status  
Software version.  
Summary of the installed software.  
The date and time (UTC) the software was installed.  
The status of the installed software.  
The detailed install log for this software.  
The status of the installation:  
Details  
Status  
Success—Software was installed with no errors.  
Warning—Software installed successfully with minor errors.  
Error—Software installation was unsuccessful.  
Details  
The detailed install log for this installation, including warning  
and error messages.  
Step 2  
Click View Log in the Details field to view the detailed install log for a software  
installation.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Related Topics  
Viewing Software Status, page 5-37  
Browsing the Repository, page 5-43  
Managing the Software, page 5-37  
Overview: Security  
The WLSE provides the following security features:  
Optional secure connection through a Web browser  
Connection through the CLI via Telnet  
authentication services  
Flexible user access to managed devices and Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
You can manage your system’s security by:  
Selecting an Authentication Module, page 5-47  
Disabling or Enabling Telnet and Selecting SSH, page 5-49  
Viewing the Last 10 Logged-On Users, page 5-49  
Managing Security  
The Security options include:  
Authentication Modules—Choose the authentication module used (see  
Overview: Authentication Modules, page 5-46).  
SSL (HTTPS)—Obtain a permanent, signed Certificate Signed Request (see  
Managing SSL (HTTPS), page 5-48).  
Telnet and SSH—Configure Telnet and SSH settings (see Disabling or  
Enabling Telnet and Selecting SSH, page 5-49).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Last 10 Logins—View information about the last 10 users who have logged  
on to the WLSE (see Viewing the Last 10 Logged-On Users, page 5-49).  
Overview: Authentication Modules  
The Wireless LAN Solution Engine provides a mechanism for authenticating  
users through the local authentication module and a local database of user IDs and  
passwords. Many network managers, however, already have an authentication  
service. To use your own authentication service instead of the local module, you  
can select one of the alternative modules:  
TACACS+  
Radius  
MS NT Domain  
After you select and configure a module, all authentication transactions are  
performed by the authentication service associated with that module. Users log in  
with the user ID and password associated with the current authentication module.  
The Wireless LAN Solution Engine determines user roles; therefore, all users  
must be in the local database of user IDs and passwords. A user’s role determines  
the services and devices that the user can access. Users must have the same user  
ID locally as they have in the alternative authentication source, but the local  
password and authentication service password do not have to be same.  
Users who are authenticated by an alternative service and who are not in the local  
splash screen after logging in and cannot view screens or perform tasks.  
If the alternative authentication service fails, the Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
defaults to the Local authentication module. Even if the local user database fails,  
you can always log in as the admin user.  
Related Topics  
Selecting an Authentication Module, page 5-47  
Administering Users, page 5-60  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Selecting an Authentication Module  
The Local login module is selected by default, but you can select a different  
module.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Appliance > Security > Authentication Modules. The  
Authentication Modules dialog box appears.  
Select an authentication module from the Select Module drop down list, then click  
Submit. A Configuration dialog box appears for all selections except the Local  
module.  
Step 3  
Depending on the authentication module you selected, enter the following data,  
then click Submit:.  
Radius module or TACACS+ module:  
Primary Server and Secondary Server—IP addresses or DNS names of  
the primary and secondary authentication servers. A secondary server is  
optional.  
Shared Secret—Secret key.  
MS NT Domain module:  
Domain—Name of the Windows domain.  
Primary Domain Controller and Backup Domain Controller—Names of  
the primary and backup Windows domain controllers. A backup domain  
controller is optional.  
After you change the authentication module, you do not have to restart the  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine. Changing the module does not affect users who  
are currently logged on. Users who log on after the change use the new module.  
Related Topic  
Overview: Security, page 5-45  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Managing SSL (HTTPS)  
SSL (secure socket layer) protocol provides a secure connection between Web  
clients and the Wireless LAN Solution Engine. When you initially set up the  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine, an unsigned certificate and a CSR (Certificate  
Signed Request) are automatically generated and SSL is enabled. The unsigned  
certificate expires in one year. To obtain a permanent, signed certificate, use the  
following procedure.  
Note  
To establish a connection to the Wireless LAN Solution Engine using SSL, use  
the prefix https instead of http when entering the URL into the browser and do  
not append a port number to the URL.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Appliance > Security > SSL (HTTPS). The SSL  
(HTTPS) dialog box appears.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Click View CSR. The encrypted CSR is displayed.  
Copy the encrypted CSR (between the begin and end lines). Send the CSR to a  
certificate authority (such as Verisign), following the authority’s procedure.  
Step 4  
When you receive the signed certificate:  
a. Copy it into an ASCII file on a client system.  
b. On the same client, select Administration > Security.  
c. Under SSL (HTTPS), type the path to the signed certificate or click Browse  
to locate the file, then click Submit Certificate.  
d. To use the new certificate, you need to restart the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine by logging on through the CLI, running the services stop command  
to stop the system, then running the services start command to restart the  
system.  
Related Topic  
Overview: Security, page 5-45  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Disabling or Enabling Telnet and Selecting SSH  
Telnet is used for connecting to the Wireless LAN Solution Engine through the  
CLI. By default, Telnet is enabled. To prevent unsecure connections through the  
CLI, you can disable Telnet.  
SSH provides a secure Telnet connection, encrypting all traffic, including  
passwords. By default, both SSH1 and SSH2 are used.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Administration > Appliance > Security > SSH and Telnet. The SSH and  
Telnet control panel appears.  
To change the type of SSH used, select the desired SSH version from Select  
To enable or disable Telnet, make a selection from Telnet, then click Configure.  
Changes takes place immediately.  
Related Topic  
Overview: Security, page 5-45  
Viewing the Last 10 Logged-On Users  
You can view information about the last 10 users who have logged on to  
the WLSE.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Appliance > Security > Last 10 Logins.  
The Last 10 Logins table appears, showing the following information for the last  
10 logins.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Field  
Description  
Login Name  
Logged In Since  
IP Address  
User’s login name.  
Date and time the user logged in (GMT).  
IP address of the system from which the user  
Associated role  
Role assigned to the user.  
Related Topic  
Overview: Security, page 5-45  
Backing Up and Restoring Data  
The Backup and Restore options include:  
Backup—Back up data, including all Wireless LAN Solution Engine role and  
user information (see Backing Up Data, page 5-51).  
Restore—Restore an available backup image (see Restoring Data,  
page 5-52).  
Configure—Set the backup location (see Configuring the Backup Location,  
page 5-50).  
Configuring the Backup Location  
The backup location should be running an FTP server, because the Wireless LAN  
Solution Engine pushes the backed-up data to the FTP server.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Administration > Appliance > Backup and Restore > Configure.  
Enter the hostname/IP for the backup location.  
Enter the username you use on the backup location machine.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Step 6  
Step 7  
Enter the password you use on the backup location machine.  
Optional—Specify the path to which the backup image is saved.  
Click Save.  
Related Topics  
Backing Up Data, page 5-51  
Restoring Data, page 5-52  
Backing Up Data  
Data backed up includes Wireless LAN Solution Engine role and user  
information, seed and discovery (see Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2)  
configuration information, and customized view information.  
Note  
You should perform a backup every time you add a user, or whenever user  
views have changed.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Configure the backup location (see Configuring the Backup Location, page 5-50).  
Select Administration > Appliance > Backup and Restore > Backup.  
Click Backup.  
The WLSE saves the backup image.  
Step 4  
To confirm that your data has been backed up, look at your backup location for a  
backup directory with saved <WLSE hostname_date_time.inf and <WLSE  
hostname_date_time.tar files.  
Related Topic  
Restoring Data, page 5-52  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Restoring Data  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > Appliance > Backup and Restore > Restore.  
From the Available Images list, select a backup image. Images are listed by  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine hostname and date and time of backup.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Click Restore. The Restore Backup window opens.  
Click OK.  
The Wireless LAN Solution Engine shuts down and restarts while data is being  
restored.  
Related Topics  
Backing Up Data, page 5-51  
Configuring the Backup Location, page 5-50  
Using Diagnostics  
The Diagnostics options are:  
WLSE Info—Gather troubleshooting information about the WLSE status  
and create status reports (see Viewing and Creating a Status Report,  
page 5-53).  
Self Test—Create and display self tests (see Viewing and Creating a Self-Test  
Report, page 5-53).  
Processes—View WLSE processes status, stop and start processes (see  
Viewing Processes, page 5-54).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Viewing and Creating a Status Report  
You can gather troubleshooting information about the status of the Wireless LAN  
Solution Engine using this option.  
Status reports show information about the product database status, product  
process status, log files, and so on.  
Note  
Status reports reflect the UTC time.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Select Administration > Appliance > Diagnostics > WLSE Info. The WLSE  
Information and Status Report dialog box appears.  
To display a report, click its name. If there are no reports listed, you must create  
a new report by clicking Create.  
To create a new report, click Create. It will take five to seven minutes for the  
is not listed, click Refresh.  
Step 4  
To delete a report, click the report check box, then click Delete.  
Related Topics  
Viewing and Creating a Self-Test Report, page 5-53  
Viewing Processes, page 5-54  
Viewing and Creating a Self-Test Report  
Self-tests include memory, database, DNS setup, and backup location  
configuration tests. Self-test reports indicate whether the tests passed or failed.  
Note  
Self-test reports reflect UTC time.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Select Administration > Appliance > Diagnostics > Self Test. The WLSE  
Self-Test Report dialog box appears.  
To display a report, click its name. If there are no reports listed, you must create  
a new report by clicking Create.  
Refresh.  
To delete a report, select the report check box, then click Delete.  
Related Topics  
Viewing and Creating a Status Report, page 5-53  
Viewing Processes, page 5-54  
Viewing Processes  
You can view the status of the major processes running on the Wireless LAN  
Solution Engine using this option. You can also start and stop processes and  
access complete reports.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Appliance > Diagnostics > Processes. The Process  
Report displays the following:  
Column  
Description  
Process name  
State  
Describes how a process is registered.  
Process status and a summary of the log file entries for  
the process.  
Pid  
Process ID. A unique number by which the operating  
system identifies each running program.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
Column  
Description  
RC  
Return code. “0” represents normal program operation.  
Any other number typically represents an error. Refer to  
the error log.  
Signo  
Signal number. “0” represents normal program  
operation. Any other number is the last signal delivered  
to the program before it terminated.  
Start Time  
Stop Time  
Core  
Time (UTC) and date the process was started.  
Time (UTC) and date the process was stopped.  
The entry “Not applicable” means the program is running  
normally.  
The entry “Core file created” means the program is not  
running normally and the operating system has created a  
file called a core file. The core file stores important data  
about processes.  
Information  
The entry indicates what the process is doing. “Not  
applicable” means the program is not running normally.  
Step 2  
Perform any or all of these tasks:  
To view details, click any process name. The Daemon Information window  
opens.  
To view process status, click any process state. The System Log window  
opens.  
To stop a process, select the check box next to the process name and click  
Stop. The Process Status table displays the new status and other process  
information. The WebServer and Tomcat processes cannot be stopped.  
To start a stopped process, select the check box next to that process name and  
click Start. The Process Status table displays the new status and other process  
information.  
To update the Process Status table with the latest data, click Refresh. The  
table does not automatically update.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
To see a complete report of all processes running on the WLSE, click  
Complete Report.  
Processes Displayed  
The Process Status table displays the status of the following major WLSE-specific  
processes:  
Process Name  
WLSEjobvm  
WLSEFaults  
WebServer  
Description  
The job virtual machine.  
The fault manager.  
The Web Server.  
Tomcat  
The Java servlet engine.  
The process that forwards traps.  
ExcepReporter  
CDPbrdcast  
The CDP daemon that identifies Cisco devices to their  
immediate neighbors.  
PerfMon  
The process that monitors performance.  
Daemon Information  
The Daemon Information dialog box displays the following:  
Field  
Description  
Process  
Path  
The process name.  
The file location.  
Flags  
The flags used to register the process with the Daemon  
Manager.  
Startup  
The method used to start the process.  
Dependencies  
The other processes that must be running for this process to  
run.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing the Appliance  
System Log  
The system log, which describes the status of the processes running in the system,  
displays the following:  
Field  
Description  
Timestamp  
Process  
Type  
The date and time the message is logged.  
The process that logged the message.  
The message type, such as INFO, WARNING, CRITICAL.  
The process status as known by the Daemon Manager.  
Information  
Setting Up the Splash Screen Message  
The Splash Screen Message window allows you to set up a message that is  
displayed when a user logs in. After viewing the message, the user must click  
Agree to continue logging in, or click Disagree to log out.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Appliance > Splash Screen. The Splash Screen  
Message window appears.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Enter the message to be displayed.  
Check the Enable check box, then click Apply. The splash screen message is  
enabled.  
Note  
You must check Enable for the message to appear.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing System Parameters  
Managing System Parameters  
The System Parameters window allows you to set global parameters. For example,  
to set the interval at which the Wireless Clients reports will be updated, change  
the Wireless Client Polling Interval parameters.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > System Parameters. The following parameters are  
displayed in the System Parameters window:  
Parameter  
Description  
Inventory Polling Interval  
Interval at which the configuration data will be collected from the  
devices. (This is the data shown in any GUI device detail table.)  
Tip  
For more accurate trending, set this parameter at a lower  
interval than Inventory Performance Attributes Polling  
Interval.  
Default: 1 hour  
Inventory Performance  
Attributes Polling Interval  
Interval at which the performance and utilization data will be  
collected from the devices.  
To set the aggregation period of this data, change the Aggregation  
Interval parameter.  
Default: 5 minutes  
Wireless Client Polling Interval Interval at which the device data is collected for client information  
and the Wireless Clients reports are updated.  
Default: 5 minutes  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Managing System Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Interval at which the performance data (from Inventory  
Aggregation Interval  
Performance Attributes Polling Interval) is aggregated. (This is the  
data shown in Report Trends.)  
Note  
over longer periods (average, percentages, changes).  
This interval determines how often these computations  
are performed.  
Default: 3 hours  
Short Term Trending Inventory Duration for which the performance data (from Inventory  
Truncation Interval  
Performance Attributes Polling Interval) is retained by the WLSE.  
Default: 1 day  
Aggregation Truncation Interval Duration for which the aggregated (historical) data is retained by  
the WLSE.  
Default: 15 days  
Fault History Truncation Interval Duration for which the fault data is retained. (This is the data shown  
in Fault Description.)  
Default: 30 days  
Job History Truncation Interval Duration for which job data is retained. (This is the data shown in  
Configure Jobs, Discovery History, Email Jobs.)  
Note  
Recurring jobs are truncated every day to retain the last  
30 runs.  
Default: 30 days  
Step 2  
To change any of the parameters, select new values from the pulldown lists and  
click Apply to save the changes. To reset the system parameters to the previous  
values, click Reset.  
Note  
To reset the parameters to previous values, click Reset before saving.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Administering Users  
A confirmation dialog appears. To return to the System Parameters window, click  
Back.  
Administering Users  
The User Admin options allow you to manage user roles and logins:  
Manage Roles—Add, modify, and delete roles (see Managing Roles,  
page 5-60).  
Manage Users—Add, modify, and delete user accounts (see Managing  
Users, page 5-62).  
Related Topic  
Modifying Your Profile, page 5-65  
Managing Roles  
Use this option to add, modify, and delete user-defined roles and to modify  
predefined roles. A user’s role determines the tabs and subtabs the user can access.  
Users who have access to a subtab can perform all of the tasks under the subtab.  
Although you cannot delete predefined roles, you can modify them. The  
predefined roles and their default privileges are:  
System administrator—Superuser access to the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine (can perform any task). The password is the password assigned during  
initial WLSE setup (using the console). You can change the password using  
the console or the WLSE’s Manage Users option (see Managing Users,  
page 5-62).  
Network administrator—Monitoring authority, device configuration  
authority, and discovery configuration authority.  
Network operator—Monitoring and device configuration authority.  
Help desk—Monitoring authority only.  
You can create other roles, which can be modified or deleted.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Administering Users  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
To access the role management window, select Administration > User Admin >  
Manage Roles. Role names are displayed in the center pane. To view the subtabs  
to which the role has access, select the role.  
The admin user can view all existing roles.  
Other users can only view the roles assigned to them and any roles that they  
have created.  
Step 2  
To add a role:  
a. Replace the text New Role with the name you have chosen for the new role.  
b. Select the check boxes next to the features the role will access. Click Add.  
Note  
When you select a feature (for example, Display Faults), the role  
is granted access to the corresponding subtab (for example,  
Faults > Display Faults).  
c. The new role appears in the list of roles in the middle pane.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
To modify a role, select the role. Select the check boxes for the features you want  
to add to the role and deselect the check boxes next to the features you want to  
remove from the role. Then click Modify to save the changes.  
To delete a user-defined role, select the role, then click Delete.  
Related Topics  
Naming Guidelines, page A-1  
Managing Users, page 5-62  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-61  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Administering Users  
Managing Users  
Use this option to:  
Add Users, page 5-62  
Modify Users, page 5-63  
Delete Users, page 5-65  
Add Users  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > User Admin > Manage Users. The Add/Modify/Delete  
dialog appears. The Users list displays the current users.  
The admin user can view and modify all existing users.  
Other users can view their own logins and any users they have created.  
Step 2  
Enter the following information, in the order shown:  
Note  
To clear your entries and start over, click Clear.  
Field  
Information to Enter  
User Name  
Enter the name of the new user.  
Enter a password for new user.  
User Password  
Confirm Password Reenter the password.  
Email Enter the email address of the user (optional).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Administering Users  
Field  
Information to Enter  
CLI Access  
Select the user’s access to the WLSE CLI: None, Level 0,  
or Level 15. By default, Level 15 is selected for System  
Administrator, and None is selected for other users. Users  
with privilege level 15 can use all commands, and users  
with privilege level 0 can use a subset.  
Roles  
Select one or more roles for the user. To add a role, select  
it from the pulldown list. To view a role, select it and click  
show role. To remove a role, select it and click remove.  
Step 3  
To add the new user, click Add. The new username appears in the Users list. To  
discard your changes, click Clear.  
Modify Users  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use these options.  
Procedure  
To modify a user:  
Step 1  
Select Administration > User Admin > Add/Modify/Delete. The  
Add/Modify/Delete dialog appears. The Users list displays the current users.  
Note  
Only the logins created by you are displayed. If logins were created by  
another user, they are not visible; only their creator can display them.  
The admin user can view all logins.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Administering Users  
Step 2  
Select the user from the Users list and make the desired changes:  
Field  
Information to Enter  
User Name  
User Password  
Confirm Password  
Email  
Enter the user’s name.  
Enter a new password for new user.  
Reenter the new password.  
Enter or change the user’s email address.  
CLI Access  
Change the user’s access to the WLSE CLI: None, Level  
0, or Level 15. By default, Level 15 is selected for  
System Administrator, and None is selected for others.  
Users with privilege level 15 can use all commands, and  
users with privilege level 0 can use a subset. For  
information on commands available for each privilege  
level, see the User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine—From the online help,  
click View PDF.  
Roles  
Change the user’s roles. To add a role, select it from the  
pulldown list. To view a role, select it and click show  
role. To remove a role, select it and click remove.  
Step 3  
Click Modify to save your changes or Clear to discard your changes.  
Related Topics  
Naming Guidelines, page A-1  
Managing Roles, page 5-60  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Modifying Your Profile  
Delete Users  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > User Admin > Manage Users. The Manage Users  
dialog appears.  
Select the username from the Users list, then click Delete. A confirmation dialog  
appears. After you click OK, the user is deleted.  
Modifying Your Profile  
Use the My Profile tab to change your password.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Select Administration > My Profile > Change password.  
To change your password, enter a new password in the New Password and  
Re-enter New Password fields. For information on allowable characters, see  
Naming Guidelines, page A-1.  
Step 3  
Click Apply to save your changes or Reset to discard your changes.  
Related Topic  
Modify Users, page 5-63  
Naming Guidelines, page A-1  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
5-65  
       
Chapter 5 Performing Administrative Tasks  
Using Connectivity Tools  
Using Connectivity Tools  
The options in the Connectivity Tools window allow you to perform connectivity  
tests and find information about devices.  
Note  
Your login determines whether you can use this option.  
Procedure  
Step 1  
Select Administration > Connectivity Tools. The Network Connectivity and  
Security Test dialog box appears.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Enter a device name or IP address in the Device text box.  
Click an option button:  
Note  
Pressing Enter will not work. You must click a button.  
Ping—Test device reachability.  
Traceroute—Detect routing errors between the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine and the target device.  
NSLookup—Look up device or host information via the name server. The  
information displayed includes server name, server IP address, device name,  
and the device IP address.  
TCP Port Scan—Find the active ports on the device.  
A results window appears.  
Step 4  
Click Close to close the results window.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C H A P T E R  
6
Frequently Asked Questions  
Q. What ports and protocols does the WLSE use?  
A. For discovery and fault monitoring, the WLSE primarily uses SNMP (UDP  
port 161). For applying configuration changes, the WLSE uses SNMP, HTTP  
(TCP port 80 or as configured), and TFTP (UDP port 69).  
Q. How do configuration files get transferred to access points?  
A. Even though access points support both TFTP and FTP, the WLSE uses only  
TFTP to upload and download configuration files.  
Q. Can you undo a configuration update?  
A. Yes, but only after a successful configuration update has taken place.  
Q. Is Telnet enabled or disabled by default on the WLSE?  
A. Telnet is disabled by default for security reasons.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6 Frequently Asked Questions  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
6-2  
C H A P T E R  
7
Troubleshooting  
This section provides suggestions for troubleshooting the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine components. If the suggestions do not resolve the error, check the release  
notes for a possible work around, or contact the Cisco TAC or your customer  
support.  
This section includes troubleshooting suggestions for the following:  
Faults, page 7-2  
Configure, page 7-2  
Reports, page 7-7  
Administration, page 7-9  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
7-1  
     
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Faults  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Not applicable.  
Faults > Display  
Faults  
The Display Fault There are no faults to  
view is blank.  
report based on the  
filtering criteria you  
entered.  
Faults > Fault  
Forwarding  
Email fails to arrive The SMTP server is not Configure the SMTP server  
at destination.  
configured properly.  
using the mailroute  
command.  
For information on the  
mailroute command, select  
Help > View PDF, then select  
the Command Reference  
appendix.  
Configure  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Configure >  
Templates  
The access point is The HTTP port setting  
Cold reboot the access point.  
inaccessible  
does not take effect until  
the access point is cold  
rebooted.  
through the HTTP  
port set through  
template  
configuration job.  
Template  
The access point is not set Make sure the WLSE is  
configuration job  
fails every time.  
up properly.  
configured as a TFTP server  
for the access point.  
For additional information,  
see Getting Started,  
page 1-3.  
Configure > Jobs  
The Undo function Your job is SNMP-based, None.  
does not work.  
which is not supported by  
the Undo function.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Configure > Jobs  
The Undo function Your job includes the  
None.  
does not work.  
following Security  
options, which are not  
supported by the Undo  
function:  
Local Admin  
Authentication under  
the Local Admin  
Access  
Encryption Key  
Values under Local  
AP/Client Security  
Shared Secret under  
Server-Based  
Security.  
Shared Secret under  
Accounting.  
Your job includes the  
FTP Username and  
password.  
None.  
You are trying to Undo a None.  
job that has already been  
undone.  
Your job is HTTP-based Add HTTP credentials using  
but you have not set up  
the HTTP credentials.  
Administration >Discover  
>Device Credentials >  
HTTP User/Password  
You are trying to Undo a None.  
job that contains Custom  
values, which are not  
supported by the Undo  
function.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
7-3  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Configure > Jobs  
HTTP job does not The credentials are not set Make sure the credentials on  
run or fails.  
properly.  
the WLSE are the same as  
the credentials on the access  
point or bridge using  
Administration > Discover  
> Device Credentials.  
Make sure the credentials on  
the access point or bridge  
have firmware rights.  
The TFTP server is not  
set up correctly.  
The TFTP setting on the  
access point should point to  
the WLSE as its TFTP  
server. This can be done by  
applying a template  
configuration, containing  
TFTP server settings,  
through an SNMP job (only  
11.08T and higher)  
The device is not  
responding to HTTP disabled on the AP  
jobs. because of this job run.  
HTTP browsing is  
At the access point console,  
turn on non-console  
browsing, or schedule an  
SNMP job for the device if  
its version is11.08T or  
higher.  
SNMP job does not The community string is Make sure the SNMP  
run or fails.  
not set properly.  
community string set on the  
WLSE is the same as the  
string set on the access point  
or bridge using  
Administration > Discover  
> Device Credentials.  
Make sure the SNMP  
community string on the  
access point or bridge has  
firmware rights.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
7-4  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Configure > Jobs  
The job failed.  
There are multiple  
reasons a job may have  
failed.  
Make sure all the  
bootstrapping steps have  
been performed correctly on  
the access point.  
Check the jobvm.log by  
selecting Administration >  
Appliance > Status > View  
Log File to further identify  
and report the problem.  
If after applying a  
Check if “Verification could  
configuration template on not be completed” appears  
a device, the device  
reboots, the job will be  
categorized as Failed.  
in the Job Run Detail > Job  
Run Log to identify this  
problem.  
When applying a  
configuration template on  
a job with multiple  
devices, if the job fails on  
even one of the devices,  
the job is categorized as  
Failed.  
The job is reported The SNMP timeout to the Select Administration >  
as failed, but the  
configuration was  
applied successfully  
to the devices.  
device is too short.  
Discover > Device  
Credentials > SNMP  
Communities and increase  
the SNMP timeout.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
7-5  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Configure > Jobs  
The job completed This error can be seen in Check if “Completed with  
with errors.  
jobs where pre- or post-  
configuration backups  
before or after applying  
the new configuration  
fail, but the new  
errors” appears in the Job  
Run Detail > Job Run Log  
to identify this problem.  
configuration is applied  
successfully.  
There is a time  
discrepancy in  
scheduled jobs.  
The time is not set  
correctly on the WLSE.  
Using CLI commands, reset  
the time to Universal  
Coordinated Time (UTC) as  
follows:  
1. Enter services stop to  
stop services.  
2. Enter the clock  
command to reset the  
time.  
3. Enter services start to  
restart the services.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
7-6  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Reports  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Reports  
After running a job, A full polling cycle has Verify that the polling cycle has  
the updated data  
not completed and the  
completed as follows:  
does not appear in a new data has not been  
1. Select Administration >  
Appliance > Status > View  
Log File.  
report.  
entered in the database.  
2. Click jobvm.log.  
3. Scroll through the log to  
find the message: “Finished  
Inventory” for your  
particular job.  
Reports >  
Scheduled Email  
Jobs  
Email fails to  
arrive at its  
destination.  
The SMTP server is not Configure the SMTP server  
configured properly.  
using the mailroute command.  
For information on the mailroute  
command, select Help > View  
PDF, then, click Command  
Reference in the table of  
contents.  
There is a time  
The time is not set  
Using CLI commands, reset the  
discrepancy in the correctly on the WLSE. time to Universal Coordinated  
scheduled email  
jobs.  
Time (UTC) as follows:  
1. Enter services stop to stop  
services.  
2. Enter the clock command to  
reset the time.  
3. Enter services start to  
restart the services.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
The wireless client was Verify that the associated access  
associated with an points are in the managed  
access point managed by devices folder by selecting  
Administration > Discover >  
subsequently associated Managed Devices >  
with an access point that Manage/Unmanage.  
Possible Solution  
Reports >  
Wireless Clients  
The access point  
data in the  
Historical  
Associations report the WLSE, but it  
is not accurate.  
was added to the  
network, but not yet  
managed by the WLSE.  
Reports > Current The report for  
The SNMP user may not Open a browser window to the  
> Summary  
access points is  
empty.  
have the correct rights  
assigned.  
access point, and select Setup >  
Security > User Information.  
Reports > Current  
> Detailed  
Make sure that the user  
corresponding to the SNMP  
community (which is set up in  
WLSE in Discovery > Device  
Credentials) has been granted  
rights for the following: Ident,  
firmware, admin, snmp, and  
write.  
If not, click on the user and  
assign all these rights.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
7-8  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Administration  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Administration >  
Discover > Managed discovered but are been moved to the  
Devices were  
The devices have not  
Select Administration >  
Discover > Managed  
Devices  
not displayed in the Managed state.  
GUI; for example,  
in reports.  
Devices. Move the devices  
from New or Unmanaged to  
Managed. See Manage  
Devices, page 5-13.  
Administration >  
There is a time  
The time is not set  
Using CLI commands, reset  
Discover > Discover discrepancy in the correctly on the WLSE. the time to Universal  
scheduled  
Coordinated Time (UTC) as  
discovery jobs.  
follows:  
1. Enter services stop to  
stop services.  
2. Enter the clock  
command to reset the  
time.  
3. Enter services start to  
restart the services.  
Administration >  
User Admin >  
Manage Users  
Users are not  
Only the user who  
None. For more information,  
visible in the list of created a given user can see Managing Users,  
users.  
view that user’s name in page 5-62.  
the list of users, although  
the admin user can view  
all users.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Feature  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Possible Solution  
Administration >  
Discover > Managed discovered.  
Devices  
Devices were not  
The device is not  
specified as a seed and  
the CDP distance is not  
Select Administration >  
Discover > Discover >  
Modify Discovery Settings.  
high enough to reach the Specify the device as a seed  
device.  
or increase the CDP distance.  
See Add Seed Devices and  
Schedule Discovery,  
page 5-10.  
CDP is not enabled on the For more information about  
device.  
device setup, see Set Up  
Devices, page 5-4. If you are  
not using CDP, you can  
from CiscoWorks2000; see  
Importing Devices,  
page 5-21.  
A switch is not  
Make sure a properly  
discovered unless it has configured access point is  
an access point attached attached to the switch. See  
to it. Discovery can  
proceed beyond the  
switch, but the switch  
itself is not discovered.  
Set Up Devices, page 5-4.  
SNMP is not enabled on SNMP must be enabled on  
the device or SNMP  
community strings are  
must be entered on the  
not entered on the WLSE. WLSE. See Set Up Devices,  
page 5-4 or Setting Device  
Credentials, page 5-17.  
The SNMP timeouts or  
retries are set too low.  
Reset the timeouts and  
retries. See Setting Device  
Credentials, page 5-17.  
The device is down.  
None.  
None.  
The device is not  
supported.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
7-10  
 
A P P E N D I X  
A
Names and Descriptions—allowable characters for names and descriptions  
(see Name and Description Allowable Characters, page A-1).  
Roles and Users—rules to follow when creating new roles and users (see  
Roles and User Rules, page A-2).  
Name and Description Allowable Characters  
Names—no more than 64 characters allowed  
Descriptions—no more than 256 characters allowed  
Character Description  
alphanumeric—upper and lower case  
space  
Example  
a123b, A123B  
exclamation mark  
number sign  
!
#
percent sign  
%
&
( )  
*
ampersand  
left and right parenthesis  
asterisk  
plus sign  
+
,
comma  
hyphen, dash, minus  
-
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A Naming Guidelines  
Character Description  
full stop (period)  
solidus (forward slash)  
colon  
Example  
.
/
:
semicolon  
;
less-than and greater-than signs  
equals  
< >  
=
?
question mark  
low line (underscore)  
left and right square bracket  
reverse solidus (backward slash)  
left and right curly bracket  
vertical line  
_
[ ]  
\
{ }  
|
tilde  
~
dollar sign  
$
Roles and User Rules  
Type  
Rules  
User Name  
No more than 32 characters.  
Case-sensitive.  
Any character from the table above.  
5-8 characters.  
User Password  
Role  
Case-sensitive.  
Any alphanumeric character and an underscore.  
No more than 32 characters.  
Case-sensitive.  
Any character from the table above.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A P P E N D I X  
B
Command Reference  
This appendix summarizes the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s command line  
interface (CLI) commands. When you make a configuration change using these  
Command Summary, page B-4  
Command Description Conventions, page B-9  
Privilege Level 0 Commands, page B-10  
Privilege Level 15 Commands, page B-16  
Maintenance Image Commands, page B-75  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Using the CLI  
Using the CLI  
You can use the CLI by:  
Attaching a console to the WLSE  
Accessing the WLSE using Telnet  
CLI Conventions  
The command-line interface (CLI) uses the following conventions:  
The key combination ^c or Ctrl-c means hold down the Ctrl key while you  
press the c key.  
A string is defined as a nonquoted set of characters.  
Do not confuse the WLSE’s CLI with the IOS CLI. Though they are similar, they  
are not identical.  
Command Privileges  
Access to CLI commands is controlled by your user account privilege level. Users  
with privilege level 15 can use all commands. Users with privilege level 0 can use  
only a subset of the commands. The command descriptions in this appendix are  
organized by privilege level. For more information about user accounts and  
privileges, refer to Administering Users, page 5-60.  
Checking Command Syntax  
The user interface provides several types of responses to incorrect command  
entries:  
If you enter a command line that does not contain any valid commands, the  
system displays Command not found.  
If you enter a valid command but omit required options, the system displays  
Incomplete command.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Appendix B Command Reference  
Command History Feature  
If you enter a valid command but provide invalid options or parameters, the  
system displays Invalid input.  
In addition, some commands have command-specific error messages that notify  
you that a command is valid, but that it cannot run correctly.  
Command History Feature  
The CLI provides a command history feature. To display previously entered  
commands, press the up arrow key. After pressing the up arrow key, you can press  
the down arrow key to display the commands in reverse order. To run a command,  
press the Enter key while the command is displayed on the command line. You  
can also edit commands before pressing the Enter key.  
Help for CLI Commands  
You can obtain help using the following methods:  
For a list of all commands and their syntax, type help and press Enter.  
For help on a specific command, use either of the following methods:  
Type the command name, a space, help; then press Enter. For example,  
ntp help.  
Type help, a space, and the command name; then press Enter. For  
example, help ntp.  
The help contains command usage information and syntax.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix B Command Reference  
Command Summary  
Command Summary  
Table B-1 summarizes all commands available on the WLSE. Refer to the full  
description of commands that you are not familiar with before using them.  
Table B-1 Com m and Sum m ary  
Privilege  
Level  
Command  
auth  
Summary Description  
15  
Enables secure remote authentication.  
Backs up the WLSE.  
“auth” section on page B-16  
backup  
“backup” section on  
page B-17  
backupconfig  
cdp  
15  
15  
Sets the configuration for all backup and “backupconfig” section on  
restore operations. page B-18  
Configures the Cisco Discovery Protocol “cdp” section on page B-19  
(CDP).  
clock  
df  
15  
Sets the WLSE’s date and time.  
“clock” section on page B-20  
Display the current storage usage on the “df” section on page B-22  
WLSE.  
erase config  
Erases the configuration in Flash memory “erase config” section on  
and reload the device.  
page B-22  
exit  
Logs user out of the WLSE.  
“exit” section on page B-10  
gethostbyname 15  
Displays IP address of a known domain “gethostbyname” section on  
name.  
page B-24  
fsck  
N/A2  
Checks and repairs the filesystem.  
“fsck” section on page B-76  
firewall  
Implements port filtering on the WLSE. “firewall” section on  
page B-23  
hostname  
import  
15  
15  
15  
Changes the system hostname.  
“hostname” section on  
page B-25  
Imports host files, or to maps IP  
addresses to hostnames.  
“import” section on page B-25  
install  
configure  
Configures the repository that the  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine uses to  
install updates.  
“install configure” section on  
page B-27  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
B-4  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Command Summary  
Table B-1 Com m and Sum m ary (continued)  
Privilege  
Command  
Level  
Summary Description  
install list  
15  
Lists software updates and images  
currently available on a configured  
repository.  
“install list” section on  
page B-28  
install update  
interface  
15  
Installs software updates and images  
from a configured repository.  
“install update” section on  
page B-29  
Configures an Ethernet interface.  
“interface” section on  
page B-29  
ip  
Defines a default domain name.  
page B-31  
domain-name  
ip name-server 15  
Specifies the address of up to three name “ip name-server” section on  
servers for name and address resolution. page B-32  
listbackup  
15  
Lists all current backups at the configured “listbackup” section on  
site.  
page B-33  
mail  
15  
Debugs and tests email settings.  
“mail” section on page B-34  
mailcntrl clear 15  
Deletes the maillog, sendqueue, or  
userqueue.  
“mailcntrl clear” section on  
page B-34  
mailcntrl list  
mailroute  
nslookup  
15  
15  
Lists the size of the userlog, userqueue, or “mailcntrl list” section on  
the sendqueue.  
page B-35  
Forwards email to a specified server.  
“mailroute” section on  
page B-36  
Translates a DNS name to its IP address “nslookup” section on  
or an IP address to its DNS name.  
page B-36  
ntp server  
Configures the Network Time Protocol  
“ntp server” section on  
(NTP) and allow the system clock to be page B-37  
synchronized by a time server.  
ping  
0
Sends ICMP echo_request packets for  
diagnosing basic network connectivity.  
“ping” section on page B-10  
reload  
151  
15  
Reboots the system.  
“reload” section on page B-39  
reinitdb  
Reinitializes the database.  
“reinitdb” section on  
page B-40  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Command Summary  
Table B-1 Com m and Sum m ary (continued)  
Privilege  
Command  
Summary Description  
repository  
15  
Configures the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine to be a repository server.  
“repository” section on  
page B-40  
repository add 15  
Transfers software updates and images  
“repository add” section on  
from a remote server to the Wireless LAN page B-41  
Solution Engine’s local repository.  
repository  
delete  
15  
Deletes software updates and images on “repository delete” section on  
the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s  
local repository.  
page B-42  
repository list 15  
Lists software updates and images on the “repository list” section on  
configured local or remote repository. page B-43  
repository  
server  
15  
Starts, stops, or displays the status of the “repository server” section on  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local  
repository.  
page B-44  
restore  
route  
15  
Restores a backed up configuration.  
“restore” section on page B-45  
Adds a route through a gateway device. “route” section on page B-46  
services  
Lists, starts, or stops management  
services.  
“services” section on  
page B-46  
show anilog  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s ANI log.  
page B-48  
show auth-cli  
Displays the type of authentication used “show auth-cli” section on  
for secure CLI access. page B-49  
show auth-http 15  
Displays the type of authentication used “show auth-http” section on  
for secure HTTP access. page B-49  
show  
backupconfig  
15  
0
Displays the current backup and restore “show backupconfig” section  
configuration. on page B-50  
show bootlog  
Displays the messages logged during the “show bootlog” section on  
last system boot. page B-51  
show cdp  
neighbor  
15  
Displays the WLSE’s nearest neighbor on “show cdp neighbor” section  
the network., on page B-52  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
B-6  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Command Summary  
Table B-1 Com m and Sum m ary (continued)  
Command  
Summary Description  
Location of Full Description  
show cdp run  
Displays the Cisco Discovery Protocol  
(CDP) configuration.  
page B-52  
show clock  
Displays the system date and time in  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).  
“show clock” section on  
page B-11  
show  
collectorlog  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s collector log.  
page B-53  
show config  
Displays the system configuration.  
page B-54  
show  
daemonslog  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s daemons log.  
page B-55  
show dmgtdlog 15  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s daemon manager log.  
page B-56  
show  
domain-name  
Displays the system domain name  
on page B-12  
show  
hseaccesslog  
15  
15  
15  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s Web access log.  
“show hseaccesslog” section  
on page B-57  
show  
hseerrorlog  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s Web error log.  
“show hseerrorlog” section on  
page B-58  
show  
hsesslaccesslo  
g
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s Web SSL log.  
“show hsesslaccesslog”  
section on page B-59  
show import  
15  
Displays imported host files.  
“show import” section on  
page B-59  
show install  
logs  
Displays the software updates and images “show install logs” section on  
available on the configured repository.  
page B-60  
show interfaces 0  
Displays information about the system  
network interface.  
“show interfaces” section on  
page B-13  
show ipchains 15  
Displays the IP chains for the selected  
interface.  
“show ipchains” section on  
page B-60  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Command Summary  
Table B-1 Com m and Sum m ary (continued)  
Command  
Level  
Summary Description  
Location of Full Description  
show hosts  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s host file.  
“show hosts” section on  
page B-61  
show maillog  
show process  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s mail log.  
“show maillog” section on  
page B-62  
Displays information about processes  
running on the system.  
page B-13  
show  
repository  
15  
15  
15  
Displays the status or the access log of a “show repository” section on  
configured repository. page B-63  
show route  
Displays the routes currently configured. “show route” section on  
page B-64  
show  
securitylog  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s secure log information.  
page B-64  
show  
snmp-server  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s SNMP configuration.  
on page B-66  
show  
ssh-version  
Displays the type of SSH enabled.  
“show ssh-version” section on  
page B-66  
show syslog  
Displays syslog information.  
“show syslog” section on  
page B-67  
show tech  
Displays information necessary for  
Cisco’s Technical Assistance Center to  
assist you.  
“show tech” section on  
page B-68  
show  
telnetenable  
15  
0
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s Telnet status.  
page B-68  
show  
tomcatlog  
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution  
Engine’s Tomcat log.  
“show tomcatlog” section on  
page B-69  
show version  
Displays information about the current  
software on the system.  
“show version” section on  
page B-14  
shutdown  
15  
Shuts down the system in preparation for “shutdown” section on  
powering it off. page B-70  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
B-8  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Command Description Conventions  
Table B-1 Com m and Sum m ary (continued)  
Privilege  
Command  
Level  
Summary Description  
snmp-server  
Configures an snmp agent.  
page B-71  
ssh  
15  
Connects to an external host using SSH “ssh” section on page B-71  
ssh-version  
Enables Secure Shell (SSH) 1, SSH 2, or “ssh-version” section on  
both SSH 1 and SSH 2.  
Telnets to an external host.  
Configures Telnet access.  
page B-72  
telnet  
15  
15  
“telnet” section on page B-72  
telnetenable  
“telnetenable” section on  
page B-73  
traceroute  
username  
0
Displays the network route to a specified “traceroute” section on  
host and identify faulty gateways. page B-15  
15  
Creates a new user account or changes an “username” section on  
account’s properties. page B-74  
1. This command is also available in the maintenance image.  
2. This command is available only in the maintenance image.  
Command Description Conventions  
Command descriptions in this document and in the CLI help system use the  
following conventions:  
Vertical bars (|) separate alternative, mutually exclusive elements.  
Square brackets ([ ]) indicate optional elements.  
Braces ({ }) indicate a required choice. Braces within square brackets ([{ }])  
indicate a required choice within an optional element.  
Boldface indicates commands and keywords that are entered literally as  
shown.  
Italics indicate arguments for which you supply values.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 0 Commands  
Privilege Level 0 Commands  
This section describes the privilege level 0 commands.  
exit  
To log out of the system, use the exit command.  
exit  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
The following command logs you out of the system:  
exit  
ping  
To send ICMP echo_request packets for diagnosing basic network connectivity,  
use the ping command.  
ping [-c count] [-i wait] [-s packetsize] [-n] {hostname | ip-address}  
Syntax Description  
c
Sets the number of echo packets to send.  
Number of echo packets to send.  
count  
i
Sets the amount of time to wait between sending each packet.  
wait  
Amount of time to wait between sending each packet, in  
seconds. The default is 1.  
s
Sets the size of each echo packet.  
packetsize  
The size of each echo packet, in bytes. The default is 56.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 0 Commands  
hostname  
Host name of system to ping.  
IP address of system to ping.  
disables reverse DNS lookup.  
ip-address  
n
Usage Guidelines  
Example  
To use this command with the hostname argument, DNS must be configured on  
the system. To force the time-out of a nonresponsive host or to eliminate a loop  
cycle, press Ctrl-c.  
This command sends 4 echo packets to the host otherhost with a wait time of  
5 seconds between each packet:  
ping -c 4 -i 5 209.165.200.224  
PING 209.165.200.224 (209.165.200.224) from 209.165.201.0 : 56(84)  
bytes of data.  
64 bytes from dns-sj1.cisco.com (209.165.200.224): icmp_seq=0 ttl=246  
time=16.3 ms  
64 bytes from dns-sj1.cisco.com (209.165.200.224): icmp_seq=1 ttl=246  
time=2.0 ms  
64 bytes from dns-sj1.cisco.com (209.165.200.224): icmp_seq=2 ttl=246  
time=2.1 ms  
64 bytes from dns-sj1.cisco.com (209.165.200.224): icmp_seq=3 ttl=246  
time=2.1 ms  
show clock  
To display the system date and time in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), use  
the show clock command.  
show clock  
Syntax Description  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 0 Commands  
Usage Guidelines  
Use the show clock command to display the system date and time. For more  
information about the system time, see the section “Setting System Date and  
Time” in the Installation and Configuration Guide for the Cisco 1105 Wireless  
LAN Solution Engine.  
Example  
This command displays the system date and time:  
show clock  
12:43:47 Jun 20 2001  
Related Commands  
clock  
ntp server  
show domain-name  
To display the system domain name, use the show domain-name command.  
show domain-name  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
This command displays the system domain name:  
show domain-name  
cisco.com  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 0 Commands  
show interfaces  
To display information about the system network interface, use the show  
interfaces command.  
show interfaces  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
This command displays information about system network interfaces:  
show interfaces  
eth0  
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:02:B3:35:FD:CC  
inet addr:209.165.200.224 Bcast:209.165.201.0  
Mask:255.255.255.224  
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1  
RX packets:80309 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0  
TX packets:22451 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0  
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100  
Interrupt:5 Base address:0xef00 Memory:d0c7e000-d0c7ec40  
Related Commands  
interface  
show process  
To display information about processes running on the system, use the show  
process command.  
show process [page]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 0 Commands  
Example  
This command displays information about processes running on the system:  
show process page  
PID PPID  
ELAPSED  
SZ  
STARTED TTY COMMAND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
81  
82  
83  
0 4-20:04:35  
1 4-20:04:35  
1 4-20:04:35  
1 4-20:04:35  
1 4-20:04:35  
1 4-20:04:28  
1 4-20:04:25  
1 4-20:04:25  
1 4-20:04:25  
1 4-20:04:25  
1 4-20:04:24  
1 4-20:04:23  
1 4-20:04:23  
1 4-20:04:17  
1 4-20:04:17  
1 4-20:04:15  
1 4-20:04:15  
1 4-20:04:14  
1 4-20:04:09  
277 Fri Jun 15 16:54:03 2001 ?  
init  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:03 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:03 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:03 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:03 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:10 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:13 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:13 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:13 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:13 2001 ?  
0 Fri Jun 15 16:54:14 2001 ?  
290 Fri Jun 15 16:54:15 2001 ?  
342 Fri Jun 15 16:54:15 2001 ?  
290 Fri Jun 15 16:54:21 2001 ?  
360 Fri Jun 15 16:54:21 2001 ?  
327 Fri Jun 15 16:54:23 2001 ?  
286 Fri Jun 15 16:54:23 2001 ?  
585 Fri Jun 15 16:54:24 2001 ?  
842 Fri Jun 15 16:54:29 2001 ?  
kflushd  
kupdate  
kpiod  
kswapd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
watchdog  
idled  
syslogd  
klogd  
crond  
inetd  
sshd  
84  
85  
199  
213  
402  
411  
517  
531  
540  
585  
dmgtd.lnx  
-----------more-----------  
show version  
To display information about the current software on the system, use the show  
version command.  
show version  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
This command displays the current software on the system:  
show version  
Copyright (c) 1999-2000 by Cisco Systems, Inc.  
Build Version (166) Mon Jun 11 16:56:23 PDT 2001  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 0 Commands  
Uptime: 4 days 20 hours 6 mins  
Linux/UID32 version 2.2.16-13bipsec.uid32 (gcc version egcs1  
traceroute  
To display the network route to a specified host and identify faulty gateways, use  
the traceroute command.  
traceroute [-f first_ttl] [-m max_ttl] [-w waittime] host [packetlength]  
Syntax Description  
-f  
(Optional) Sets the time-to-live used in the first outgoing  
probe packet.  
first_ttl  
-m  
Time-to-live value of the first outgoing probe packet. The  
default is 1 hop.  
(Optional) Sets the maximum time-to-live (maximum  
number of hops) used in outgoing probe packets.  
max_ttl  
-w  
Maximum time-to-live for outgoing probe packets. The  
default is 30 hops.  
(Optional) Sets the time to wait for a response to a probe, in  
seconds.  
waittime  
Time to wait for a response to a probe, in seconds. The  
default is 5.  
host  
Name or IP address of host to which to connect.  
packetlength  
(Optional) The length of the packet to send, in bytes. The  
default and minimum value is 40.  
Usage Guidelines  
Use the traceroute command to trace the network route to a specified host and  
identify faulty gateways. The command displays a list of the hosts that receive  
probe packets as they travel to the destination host, in the order that the receiving  
hosts receive the packets. Asterisks (*) appear as the list entry for hosts that do  
not respond to probing correctly.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Example  
This command displays the network route to the host otherhost with a packet  
time-to-live value of 2, a wait time of 5 seconds, and 50-byte packets:  
traceroute -m 20 -w 10 cisco.com 50  
traceroute to example.com (209.165.200.224), 20 hops max, 50 byte  
packets  
1 ex1.com (209.165.200.225) 0.981 ms 0.919 ms 0.926 ms  
2 ex2.com (209.165.200.254) 1.528 ms 0.747 ms 0.661 ms  
3 ex3.com (209.165.200.255) 0.887 ms 0.770 ms 0.744 ms  
4 ex4.com (209.165.201.0) 0.932 ms 0.789 ms 0.679 ms  
5 ex5.com (209.165.201.1) 1.066 ms 1.052 ms 0.983 ms  
6 ex6.com (209.165.201.30) 1.472 ms 1.247 ms 1.847 ms  
7 ex7.com(209.165.201.31) 1.738 ms 1.424 ms 1.658 ms  
8 ex8.com (209.165.202.128) 3.728 ms 2.429 ms 2.804 ms  
9 ex9.com (209.165.202.129) 6.283 ms 5.499 ms 3.285 ms  
10 ex10.com (209.165.202.158) 9.926 ms 73.463 ms 3.895 ms  
11 ex11.com (209.165.202.159) 70.967 ms * 47.106 ms  
Related Commands  
ping  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
This section describes the privilege level 15 commands. Only users with privilege  
level 15 can run them.  
auth  
Use the auth command to enable secure remote authentication.  
auth {cli | http} {local | tacacs secret server1 [server2] | radius secret  
server1 [server2] | nt domain pdc [bdc]}  
Syntax Description  
cli  
Enables authentication using the Command Line Interface  
(CLI).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
http  
Enables authentication using Hypertext Transfer Protocol  
(HTTP).  
local  
Enables local authentication.  
tacacs  
Enables authentication using the Terminal Access Controller  
Access Control System (TACACS).  
radius  
Enables authentication using Remote Dial-In User Service  
(RADIUS).  
nt  
Enables authentication from an NT domain controller.  
Shared secret code of server.  
secret  
server1  
IP address or DNS name of server from which authentication  
will occur.  
server2  
IP address or DNS name of optional secondary server from  
which authentication could occur  
domain  
pdc  
NT domain name.  
Name of the Primary Domain Controller (PDC).  
Name of the Backup Domain Controller (BDC).  
bdc  
Example  
This command enables secure remote authentication from a remote server, using  
TACACS.  
auth http tacacs tr5e43 209.165.200.224  
backup  
Use the backup command to back upthe WLSE.  
backup [test]  
Syntax Description  
test  
Tests the configured backup hostname, username, password,  
and directory.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Usage Guidelines  
To back up the WLSE, use the backup command. To configure the backup  
location, use the backupconfig command.  
Example  
The following command backs up the WLSE:  
backup  
Related Commands  
backupconfig  
listbackup  
restore  
show backupconfig  
backupconfig  
Use the backupconfig command to set the configuration for all backup and  
restore operations. To clear the backup and restore configuration information, use  
the no backupconfig command.  
backupconfig {hostname} {username} {password} [directory]  
no backupconfig  
Syntax Description  
hostname  
username  
password  
directory  
Host name or IP address of the host system.  
Username of host system.  
Password of the host system.  
Path to specific backup directory, if different from user’s  
default directory.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Usage guidelines  
To set the configuration for all backup and restore operations, use the backup  
command.  
Example  
The following command will configure the backup and restore operations to  
backup to and restore from host 209.165.200.224, set the username to user1, and  
set the password to pass:  
backupconfig 209.165.200.224 user1 pass  
The following command clears all backup and restore configuration information:  
no backupconfig  
Related Commands  
backup  
listbackup  
restore  
show backupconfig  
cdp  
Use the cdp command to configure the Cisco Discovery Protocol  
cdp {run [port] | timer seconds | holdtime seconds}  
no cdp {run [port] | timer | holdtime}  
Syntax Description  
run  
start cdp  
timer  
holdtime  
port  
set cdp packets retransmission time.  
set cdp packet info hold time.  
Ethernet port on which CDP will be enabled. Acceptable  
values are eth0-15.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
seconds  
amount of time, in seconds, that the system takes to either  
transmit the cdp packet information or to hold another  
system’s cdp packet information.  
Usage Guidelines  
Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) is a protocol by which one Cisco device can  
recognize, and be recognized by, another Cisco device. The run command starts  
the system sending out signals to the other systems. The timer command sets the  
amount of time, in seconds, that these signals are sent. The holdtime sets the  
amount of time a system will recognize another system without receiving a signal.  
For example, if your system’s holdtime is set to 30 seconds, and another system  
that has already been recognized by yours does not send a signal within that  
30 seconds, your system will cease to recognize it. If you are using the no cdp  
command, the timer and holdtime commands set their respective values to the  
default value.  
Example  
This command sets the cdp packet’s retransmission time at 10 seconds.  
cdp timer 10  
This command sets the cdp packet’s retransmission to its default time.  
no cdp timer  
clock  
To set the system date and time, use the clock command. See the Usage  
Guidelines before using this command.  
clock {set hh:mm:ss month day year}  
Syntax Description  
set  
Sets the system clock.  
hh:mm:ss  
Current time (for example, 13:32:00).  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
month  
Current month. You can enter full month names or  
abbreviations that include at least the first 3 characters of the  
month name (for example, jan, feb, mar).  
day  
Day of the month (for example, 1 to 31).  
Current year (for example, 2000).  
year  
Usage Guidelines  
When resetting the time, you must stop and restart WLSE services:  
Step 1  
Stop services:  
services stop  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Change the time.  
Start services:  
services start  
To set the date and time, use the set option.  
If you configure the system to use Network Time Protocol (NTP), you do not need  
to set the system clock manually using the clock command.When setting the  
clock, enter the current time in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).  
For more information about the system time, refer to “Setting System Date and  
Time” in the Installation and Configuration Guide for the Cisco 1105 Wireless  
LAN Solution Engine.  
Example  
This command sets the date and time:  
clock set 16:00:00 dec 11 2001  
Tue Dec 11 16:00:00 UTC 2001  
Related Commands  
ntp server  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show clock  
df  
To display the current storage usage on the WLSE, use the df command.  
df  
Usage Guidelines  
Example  
This command in primarily intended as a debugging tool for problems with full  
partitions.  
The following command displays the current storage usage on the WLSE:  
df  
Filesystem  
/dev/sda12  
/dev/sda1  
/dev/sda7  
/dev/sda8  
/dev/sda6  
/dev/sda13  
/dev/sda9  
/dev/sda10  
/dev/sda5  
Size Used Avail Use% Mounted on  
151M 59M 92M 39% /  
49M 2.8M 44M 6% /boot  
985M  
601M  
24M 911M  
32M 569M  
3% /extra  
5% /home  
1001M 136M 865M 14% /opt  
9.7G  
601M  
32M 9.7G  
32M 569M  
0% /tftpboot  
5% /tmp  
591M 212M 350M 38% /usr  
2.9G 450M 2.5G 15% /var  
erase config  
To erase the configuration in flash memory and reload the device, use the erase  
config command.  
erase config  
Syntax Description  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Usage Guidelines  
Use this command to erase the configuration in Flash memory and reload the  
device.  
When you enter the command, you are prompted for confirmation. Enter yes to  
confirm, or press Enter to accept the default response no.  
Caution  
When you confirm this command, the system configuration is erased and the  
system reboots automatically. The system will not operate until you  
reconfigure it.  
When the system reboots, you must reconfigure it with the setup program. For  
information about using the setup program, refer to the Installation and  
Configuration Guide for the Cisco 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine.  
Example  
This command erases the system configuration:  
erase config  
This will erase your configuration, return device t  
o factory defaults, and reload the device  
Do you want to continue?[no]:yes  
firewall  
To implement port filtering on the WLSE, use the firewall command.  
firewall eth <0-5> [public | private] | [icmp telnet ssh snmp https 1741]  
Syntax Description  
eth <0-5>  
Port to be configured. Acceptable values are eth0-5.  
public  
Denies access via ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, and the HTTP 1741  
port.  
private  
icmp  
Denies no access.  
Denies Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) ping  
messages.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
telnet  
Denies incoming Telnet connections.  
ssh  
Denies incoming SSH connections.  
snmp  
https  
1741  
Denies incoming SNMP requests.  
Denies all connections to the SSL HTTP port.  
Denies all connections to the HTTP 1741 port.  
Usage Guidelines  
Use the firewall command to implement port filtering on the WLSE. To configure  
an Ethernet port for secured public access, use the public option. To configure an  
Ethernet port for local access, via a LAN or VLAN, use the private option. To  
dissable icmp, Telnet, ssh, snmp, https, or to deny connections to the SSL HTTP  
port or the HTTP 1741 port, use its corresponding option.  
Example  
The following is an example of a secure Ethernet port configuration:  
The Ethernet 0 port is connected to the Internet, and is configured to be  
accessible only via HTTPS by entering the following command:  
firewall eth0public ssh 1741  
The Ethernet 1 port is connected to an internal LAN or VLAN, and is  
configured to be accessible via any of the supported protocols by entering the  
following command:  
firewall eth1 private  
An on-site user has full access to the WLSE, but an external user can only  
access it using a secure connection.  
gethostbyname  
Use the gethostbyname command to display the IP address of a known domain  
name.  
gethostbyname host  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
host  
Domain name of host.  
Example  
This command displays the IP address of example.com  
gethostbyname example.com  
209.165.200.224  
hostname  
To change the system hostname, use the hostname command.  
hostname name  
Syntax Description  
Example  
name  
New hostname for the WLSE; the name is case sensitive and  
may be from 1 to 22 alphanumeric characters.  
The following example changes the hostname to sandbox:  
hostname sandbox  
import  
To import host files, or to map IP addresses to hostnames, use the import  
command:  
import {host hostname ipaddress} | {hosts ftp-host username password path}  
no import {host hostname ipaddress} | {hosts}  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
host  
Maps one IP address to a hostname.  
hostname  
Hostname to map IP address to.  
hosts  
Imports host files from ftp accessible host.  
IP address to map Hostname to.  
ipaddress  
password  
path  
Password used to access ftp accessible host.  
Path to ftp accessible host.  
ftp-host  
username  
IP address of ftp accessible host.  
username use to access ftp accessible host.  
Usage Guidelines  
To map a single hostname to an IP address, enter the import command as follows  
import host hostname ipaddress  
To import host files from an external, ftp accessible server, enter the import  
command as follows:  
import hosts ftp-host username password path  
To remove an individual IP address from a host file, use the no version of the  
import command as follows:  
no import host hostname ipaddress  
To remove an imported host file, use the no version of the import command as  
follows:  
no import hosts  
Example  
This command imports host files from the ftp accessible server ftpserver_1.  
Ftpserver_1 has the username admin, the password pass, and the path  
/ftpserver_1/hosts.  
import hosts ftpserver_1 admin pass /ftpserver_1/hosts  
This command deletes the hosts imported in the example above:  
no import hosts  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
install configure  
To define the repository that the Wireless LAN Solution Engine uses to install  
software updates and images, use the install configure command.  
install configure {URL URL Value | default | save}  
Syntax Description  
URL  
Sets the URL of the repository.  
URL Value  
The URL of the repository. The URL should take the form of  
http://host:port/path (the path is not a requirement).  
default  
save  
Configures the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to be its own  
repository. The URL is http://localhost:9851.  
Saves the current configuration in the install.ini file.  
Usage Guidelines  
Example  
The install configure command defines the repository that the Wireless LAN  
Solution Engine uses. A repository is a remote or local server from where a  
system can download software updates and images. Only HTTP is supported.  
The following command configures the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to use  
http://209.165.200.22, with port 9851, as a repository:  
install configure URL http://209.165.200.224:9851  
Related Commands  
install update  
install list  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
install list  
To list software updates and images currently available on the configured  
repository, use the install list command.  
install list [all | full | page | updates]  
Syntax Description  
all  
Displays all software updates and images on a configured  
repository. This command displays the name, the version, the  
requirements, the type, and a summary of the software.  
full  
Displays only the complete images on a configured  
repository.This command displays the name, the version, the  
requirements, the type, and a summary of the image.  
page  
Displays only the names of all software updates and images  
on a configured repository. All other information is omitted.  
updates  
Displays only the updates on a configured repository. This  
command displays the name, the version, the requirements,  
the type, and a summary of the update.  
Usage Guidelines  
Example  
The install list command displays software updates and images currently  
available on a repository. A repository is a remote or local server from where a  
system can receive software.  
Enter the following command to display a list of all available software updates  
and images on a configured repository:  
install list all  
Name  
EX-1.02  
Version Requires  
Type  
Summary  
1.02  
1.1aR  
1.1a  
1.0a  
1.0aR  
1.0  
HSE-1.0  
HSE-1.1  
HSE-1.1  
HSE-1.0  
HSE-1.0  
HSE-1.0  
HSE-1.0  
UPDATE  
UPDATE  
UPDATE  
UPDATE  
UPDATE  
COMPLETE  
COMPLETE  
Hosting Solution...  
Hosting Solution...  
Hosting Solution...  
Hosting Solution...  
Hosting Solution...  
Hosting Solution...  
Hosting Solution...  
EX-1.1aR  
EX-1.1a  
EX-1.0a  
EX-1.0aR  
EX-1.0-ROB  
EX-1.0  
1.0  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
B-28  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Related Commands  
install configure  
install update  
install update  
To install a software update or image, use the install update command.  
install update package name  
Syntax Description  
Package Name  
Name of the software update or image to be installed. To see  
the names of software updates and images available for  
installation, use the install list command. For more  
information, see the “install list” section on page B-28.  
Example  
The following command installs the update EX-2.0:  
install update EX-2.0  
Related Commands  
install configure  
install list  
interface  
To configure an Ethernet interface, use the interface command.  
interface eth<0-5> {[up | down] | ipaddress netmask [default-gateway  
address] [up | down]}  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
eth<0-5>  
Name of the interface port to be configured. Acceptable  
values are eth0-5.  
up  
Enables the interface (the default).  
If you include the ipaddress parameter and want to enable  
the interface in the same command, either enter the up  
parameter after ipaddress and its required parameters, or do  
not specify the up or down parameters (up is the default).  
down  
Disables the interface.  
If you include the ipaddress parameter and want to disable  
the interface in the same command, enter the down  
parameter after ipaddress and its required parameters.  
ipaddress  
The IP address of the interface.  
netmask  
The netmask of the interface IP address.  
default-gateway  
Changes the IP address of the default gateway that connects  
the WLSE to the network.  
address  
The gateway IP address.  
Default  
When you enter the interface command, the interface that you specify is enabled  
by default. If you want to disable an enabled interface or leave a disabled interface  
disabled, you must specify the down option.  
Usage Guidelines  
Use the interface command to configure an Ethernet interface.  
If you change the IP address or hostname, follow these steps to ensure that  
applications using the system can connect to it correctly:  
Step 1  
Stop and restart management services by entering:  
# services stop  
# services start  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Verify that management applications that use the system can still connect to it.  
Reconnect any applications that cannot connect to it using the system’s new IP  
address or hostname.  
Example  
This command disables the Ethernet 1 interface:  
interface eth1 down  
This command sets the Ethernet 0 IP address, netmask, and gateway IP address:  
interface eth0 209.165.200.224 255.255.255.224 default-gateway  
209.165.201.31 up  
ip domain-name  
To define a default domain name, use the ip domain-name command. To remove  
the default domain name, use the no form of the command.  
ip domain-name name  
no ip domain-name name  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
name  
Domain name (e.g. cisco.com).  
Use this command to define a default domain name.  
A default domain name allows the system to resolve any unqualified host names.  
Any IP hostname that does not contain a domain name will have the configured  
domain name appended to it. If you are using a DNS server, this appended name  
is resolved by the DNS server, and then added to the host table.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Example  
This command defines the default domain name cisco.com:  
ip domain-name cisco.com  
This command removes the default domain name:  
no ip domain-name  
Related Commands  
ip name-server  
ip name-server  
To specify the address of up to three name servers for name and address  
resolution, use the ip name-server command. To disable a name server, use the  
no form of the command.  
ip name-server ip-address  
no ip name-server ip-address  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
ip-address  
Name server IP address (maximum of 3).  
Use the ip name-server command to point the system to a specific DNS server.  
You may configure up to three servers.  
If you attempt to configure a fourth name server, the following error message  
appears:  
# Name-server table is full.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
The system must have a functional DNS server configured to function correctly.  
If it does not, in most cases it will not correctly process requests from  
management applications that use it. If the system cannot obtain DNS services  
from the network, Telnet connections to the system will fail or Telnet interaction  
with the system will become extremely slow.  
Example  
This command assigns a name server for the system to use for DNS name to  
address resolution:  
ip name-server 209.165.200.224  
This command disables the name server; the system will not use it for name to  
address resolution:  
no ip name-server 209.165.200.224  
Related Commands  
ip domain-name  
listbackup  
Use the listbackup command to list all current backups at the configured site.  
listbackup  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
The following command lists all current backups at the configured site:  
listbackup  
ex1_06042001_170640: Hostname: ex1 Date: 06042001 time: 1700  
ex1_06052001_124543: Hostname: ex1 Date: 06052001 time: 1243  
ex1_06052001_155148: Hostname: ex1 Date: 06052001 time: 1558  
ex1_06202001_145704: Hostname: ex1 Date: 06202001 time: 1454  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Related Commands  
backup  
backupconfig  
restore  
show backupconfig  
mail  
To debug and test email settings, use the mail command.  
mail [to user@host [debug]]  
Usage Guidelines  
Syntax Description  
Entering the mail command with no arguments will allow you to read email.  
Entering the mail command with the arguments listed will allow you to send  
email.  
to  
Sends email to the expressed recipient.  
Recipient of the email.  
user@host  
debug  
Debugs any email problems.  
Example  
The following command sends an email message:  
mailcntrl clear  
To delete the maillog, sendqueue, or userqueue, use the mailcntrl clear  
command.  
mailcntrl clear {log | sendqueue | userqueue}  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
log  
Clears the WLSE’s email log.  
Clears the WLSE’s sendqueue.  
Clears the WLSE’s userqueue.  
sendqueue  
userqueue  
Example  
The following command clears the WLSE’s email log.  
mailcntrl clear log  
Related Commands  
mailcntrl list  
mailcntrl list  
To list the size of the userlog, userqueue, or the sendqueue, use the mailcntrl list  
command.  
mailcntrl list {logsize | sendqueuesize | userqueuesize}  
Syntax Description  
logsize  
Size of the mail log.  
Size of the sendqueue.  
Size of the userqueue.  
sendqueuesize  
userqueuesize  
Example  
The following command displays the size of the WLSE’s email log.  
mailcntrl list logsize  
Mail log files total size: 4.0k  
Related Commands  
78-14092-01  
mailcntrl clear  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
B-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
mailroute  
To forward email to a specified SMPT server, use the mailroute command. If no  
server is specified, the WLSE will use DNS to resolve the correct email server in  
your local domain.  
mailroute {hostname | ip-address}  
Syntax Description  
Example  
hostname  
ip-address  
Host name of an email server.  
IP address of an email server.  
The following command forwards email to a server with the hostname mailserver:  
mailroute mailserver  
nslookup  
To translate a DNS name to its IP address or an IP address to its DNS name, use  
the nslookup command.  
nslookup {dns-name | ip-address}  
Syntax Description  
Example  
dns-name  
ip-address  
DNS name of a host on the network.  
IP address of a host on the network.  
The following command translates the DNS name hostname to its IP address:  
nslookup hostname  
Server: dns.ex1.com  
Address: 209.165.200.224  
Name:  
ex1.com  
Address: 209.165.201.0  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
ntp server  
To configure the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and allow the system clock to be  
synchronized by a time server, use the ntp server command. To disable this  
function, use the no form of this command.  
ntp server ip-address  
no ntp server ip-address  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
ip-address  
IP address of the NTP time server providing clock  
synchronization.  
Use the ntp server command to synchronize the system clock with the specified  
NTP server. If you configure multiple NTP servers, the system will synchronize  
with the first working NTP server it finds. There is no limit to the number of NTP  
servers that you can configure.  
The ntp server command validates the NTP server that you specify. The possible  
results are:  
If the server is a valid NTP server, a message similar to the following appears:  
# 19 Jan 00:43:48 ntpdate[1437]: step time server 209.165.200.224  
offset 999.257304  
If no NTP server with the name or IP address you specified exists, a message  
similar to the following appears:  
# 19 Jan 00:43:40 ntpdate[1431]: no server suitable for  
synchronization found  
In this case, remove the NTP server by using the no form of the command,  
then configure a valid NTP server.  
If the system time is set to a time later than the time on the NTP server, a  
message similar to the following appears:  
# 19 Jan 00:43:58 ntpdate[1265]: Can’t adjust the time of day:  
Invalid argument.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
In this case, the ntp server command is entered into the system  
configuration, but NTP will not function. Follow these steps to remove the  
command and configure NTP correctly:  
Remove the ntp server command from the configuration by entering the no form  
of the command. For example:  
no ntp server ip-address  
where ip-address is the IP address of the NTP server.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Set the system clock to a time that is behind the time on the NTP server using the  
clock set command. For more information about the clock command, refer to the  
“clock” section on page B-20.  
Enter the ntp server command again to configure the NTP server on the system.  
For example:  
ntp server ip-address  
Example  
This command configures the system to use an NTP server:  
ntp server 209.165.201.0  
This command configures the system to stop using the NTP server:  
no ntp server 209.165.201.0  
Related Commands  
clock  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
reload  
To reboot the system, use the reload command.  
reload  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
Use the reload command to reboot the system.  
You are prompted to verify the reload. Enter yes to confirm or no to cancel the  
reload.  
Caution  
All processes running on the system stop when you run the reload command.  
The WLSE will not respond while it is reloading.  
Example  
This command reboots the system:  
reload  
Related Commands  
shutdown  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
reinitdb  
To reinitialize the database, use the reinitdb command.  
reinitdb  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
The reinitdb command reinitializes the database. This erases all information  
contained within the database.  
Example  
This command reinitializes the database:  
reinitdb  
repository  
To configure the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to be a repository server, use the  
repository command.  
repository source URL  
Syntax Description  
source  
Sets the location from where the local repository downloads  
software updates and images.  
URL  
The IP address of an external server containing software  
updates and images.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Usage Guidelines  
The repository command allows the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to be a  
repository both for itself and for external systems. A repository is a remote or  
local server from where a system can receive software updates and images.  
The repository command only configures the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to  
be a repository. To configure the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to install  
software updates and images from this repository, see the “install configure”  
section on page B-27.  
Example  
To configure the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to be a repository, and to  
download software updates and images from http:// 209.165.200.224, enter the  
following command:  
Related Commands  
repository add  
repository delete  
repository list  
repository server  
repository add  
To transfer software updates and images from a remote server to the Wireless  
LAN Solution Engine’s local repository, use the repository add command.  
repository add package  
Syntax Description  
package  
Name of the software update or image to be transferred.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Usage Guidelines  
The repository add command transfers software updates and images from a  
remote server to the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local repository. You will  
be prompted to enter a username and password if they are needed to access the  
remote server.  
Example  
To transfer the update EX_2.0 from an update server to the local repository, enter  
the following command:  
Related Commands  
repository  
repository delete  
repository list  
repository server  
repository delete  
To delete software updates and images on the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s  
local repository, use the repository delete command.  
repository delete [package | all]  
Syntax Description  
all  
Deletes all software updates and images in the local  
repository.  
package  
Name of the software update or image to be deleted.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Usage Guidelines  
The repository delete command deletes software updates and images on the  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local repository. A repository is a remote or  
local server from where a system can receive software updates and images.  
Example  
The following command deletes the update EX_2.0 from the local repository:  
repository delete EX_2.0  
Related Commands  
repository  
repository add  
repository list  
repository server  
repository list  
To list software updates and images on the configured local or remote repository,  
use the repository list command.  
repository list {local | remote} [detail] [page]  
Syntax Description  
local  
Lists software updates and packages on the local repository.  
Lists software updates and packages on a remote repository.  
remote  
detail  
Includes details of the software updates and images  
displayed.  
page  
Displays the software updates and packages on page at a  
time.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Example  
To list the software updates and images available on the configured local  
repository, with details and one page at a time, enter the following command:  
repository list local detail page  
Related Commands  
repository  
repository add  
repository delete  
repository server  
repository server  
To start, stop, or view the status of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local  
repository, use the repository server command.  
repository server [stop | start | status]  
Syntax Description  
stop  
Stops the local repository.  
start  
Status  
Starts the local repository.  
Displays the status of the local repository.  
Usage Guidelines  
Example  
The repository server command starts, stops, or displays the status of the  
Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local repository. A repository is a remote or  
local server from where a system can receive software updates and images.  
The following command stops the local repository:  
repository server stop  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Related Commands  
repository  
repository add  
repository delete  
repository list  
restore  
Use the restore command to restore a backed up configuration of the WLSE.  
restore restore name  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
restore name  
Name of backup to be used to restore the WLSE.  
To restore a configuration, use the restore command. If you use the restore  
command all current domains, roles, users, and discovery configuration  
information will be erased.  
Example  
The following command will restore a backed up configuration:  
restore backup1  
Releated Commands  
backup  
backupconfig  
listbackup  
show backupconfig  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
route  
To add a route through a gateway device, use the route command. To delete a  
route, use the no version of the command.  
route {network address} netmask {network netmask} gateway {gateway  
address}  
no route {network address} netmask {network netmask}  
Syntax Description  
netmask  
Sets value of the network netmask.  
Sets the IP address of the router or gateway.  
IP address of the network.  
gateway  
network address  
network netmask  
gateway address  
Value of the network netmask.  
IP address of router or gateway.  
Example  
The following command adds a route:  
route 209.165.201.0 netmask 255.255.255.224 gateway 209.165.200.224  
The following command deletes the above route:  
no route 209.165.201.0 netmask 255.255.255.224  
services  
To list, start, or stop the management services running on the system, use the  
services command.  
services [status | start | stop]  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
status  
start  
stop  
Displays the management services status.  
Starts the management services.  
Stops the management services.  
Usage Guidelines  
Use this command to start, stop, or view status of the management services  
running on the system.  
Management services are the software installed on the system by network  
management applications. Use this command to stop and restart the management  
services if the system is not responding correctly to a management application.  
This should cause the services to reset and function properly again.  
Example  
This command stops management services:  
services stop  
This command starts management services:  
services start  
This command shows services status:  
# services status  
Process= HSECollector  
State = Running but busy flag set  
Pid  
RC  
= 588  
= 0  
Signo = 0  
Start = 06/15/01 16:54:32  
Stop  
Core  
Info  
= Not applicable  
= Not applicable  
= HSECollector started.  
Process= HSEANIServer  
State = Running but busy flag set  
Pid  
RC  
= 589  
= 0  
Signo = 0  
Start = 06/15/01 16:54:32  
-----------more-----------  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Related Commands  
show process  
show anilog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s ANI log, use the show anilog  
command.  
show anilog [page] | include MatchString1 [MatchString2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s ANI log,  
one page at a time:  
show anilog page  
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/ani.log  
SNMPThrPool: Instantiated ex.lib.snmp.lib.timer.DynamicThreadPool, mi  
n=15, max=48, maxIdleSecs=240  
2001/12/20 13:43:12 main ani MESSAGE DBConnection: Created new  
Database connecti  
on [hashCode = 45981573]  
2001/12/20 13:43:38 main ani MESSAGE ServletServiceModule: Moxie  
Servlet Engine  
is ready to receive requests  
2001/12/20 15:43:39 HSEStatusPoll ani MESSAGE DBConnection: Created  
new Database  
connection [hashCode = 85057415]  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
2001/12/20 17:43:39 HSEStatusPoll ani MESSAGE DBConnection: Created  
new Database  
connection [hashCode = 396959623]  
2001/12/20 19:43:39 HSEStatusPoll ani MESSAGE DBConnection: Created  
new Database  
--More--  
show auth-cli  
To display the type of authentication used for secure CLI access, use the show  
auth-cli command.  
show auth-cli  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
This command and response shows that the WLSE’s local authentication is being  
used for the CLI:  
show auth-cli  
local  
show auth-http  
To display the type of authentication used for secure HTTP access, use the show  
auth-http command.  
show auth-http  
Syntax Description  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
B-49  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Example  
This command and response shows that the WLSE’s local authentication is being  
used for the CLI:  
show auth-http  
local  
show backupconfig  
The show backupconfig command displays the current backup and restore  
configuration.  
show backupconfig  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
To display the current backup and restore configuration, use the show  
backupconfig command. If the backup configuration has not been set, the host  
and username fields display NONE.  
Example  
The following command displays the current backup and restore configuration:  
show backupconfig  
Hostname: 209.165.201.0  
Username: user1  
Related Commands  
backup  
backupconfig  
listbackup  
restore  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show bootlog  
To display the messages logged during the last system boot, use the show bootlog  
command.  
show bootlog [page]  
Syntax Description  
Example  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
This command displays the messages logged during the last system boot:  
show bootlog page  
Linux/UID32 version 2.2.16-13bipsec.uid32 (gcc version egcs1  
Console: colour VGA+ 80x25  
Calibrating delay loop... 1133.77 BogoMIPS  
start low memory: 0xc0001000 i386_endbase: 0xc009f000  
addresses range:: 0xc0f00000 0xc1000000  
start memory: c04f8000 end_memory: d0000000  
Memory: 257688k/262144k available (988k kernel code, 416k reserved,  
2992k data,)  
Dentry hash table entries: 262144 (order 9, 2048k)  
Buffer cache hash table entries: 262144 (order 8, 1024k)  
Page cache hash table entries: 65536 (order 6, 256k)  
vmdump: setting dump_execute() as dump_function_ptr ...  
VFS: Diskquotas version dquot_6.4.0 initialized  
CPU: Intel Pentium III (Coppermine) stepping 06  
Checking 386/387 coupling... OK, FPU using exception 16 error  
reporting.  
Checking 'hlt' instruction... OK.  
POSIX conformance testing by UNIFIX  
mtrr: v1.35a (19990819) Richard Gooch ([email protected])  
PCI: PCI BIOS revision 2.10 entry at 0xfda95  
PCI: Using configuration type 1  
-----------more-----------  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Related Commands  
reload  
clock  
show cdp neighbor  
To display the WLSE’s nearest neighbor on the network, use the show cdp  
neighbor command.  
show cdp neighbor  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
This command shows the nearest neighbor on the network.  
show cdp neighbor  
cdp neighbor device: Switch  
device type: cisco WS-C2924-XL  
port: FastEthernet0/12  
address: 209.165.201.0  
show cdp run  
To display the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) configuration, use the show  
cdp-run command.  
show cdp run  
Syntax Description  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Example  
This command displays the CDP configuration:  
show cdp run  
CDP protocol is enabled ...  
broadcasting interval is every 60 seconds.  
time-to-live of cdp packets is 180 seconds.  
CDP is enabled on port eth0.  
show collectorlog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s collector log, use the show  
collectorlog command.  
show collectorlog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s collector  
log, one page at a time:  
show collectorlog page  
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/collector.log  
2001/12/20 13:43:18 main HSECollector MESSAGE CollectorMain: Waiting  
for databas  
e to be ready  
2001/12/20 13:43:21 main HSECollector MESSAGE CollectorMain: Database  
is ready  
SNMPThrPool: Instantiated ex.lib.snmp.lib.timer.DynamicThreadPool, mi  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
n=15, max=48, maxIdleSecs=0  
2001/12/20 13:43:29 main HSECollector MESSAGE ServletServiceModule:  
Moxie Servle  
t Engine is ready to receive requests  
2001/12/20 13:43:30 PeriodicSchedulerRun:FaultCleanup HSECollector  
MESSAGE Colle  
ctorDBUtils: DB.TableCleanupCommand=[VACUUM ]  
2001/12/20 13:43:30 PeriodicSchedulerRun:FaultCleanup HSECollector  
MESSAGE Colle  
ctorDBUtils: DB.TableUpdateStatsCommand=[VACUUM ANALYZE ]  
2001/12/21 10:39:52 Moxie Servlet Engine:Pooled Thread:1 HSECollector  
MESSAGE Se  
rvletContextAdaptor: Collector: init  
show config  
To display the system configuration, use the show config command.  
show config  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
This command displays the system configuration:  
show config  
hostname ex1  
interface ethernet0 209.165.201.0 255.255.255.224 default-gateway  
209.165.202.128  
interface ethernet1 down  
interface ethernet2 down  
interface ethernet3 down  
interface ethernet4 down  
interface ethernet5 down  
ip domain-name embu-doc  
ip name-server 209.165.202.158  
username admin epassword ************* privilege 15  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show daemonslog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s daemons log, use the show  
daemonslog command.  
show daemonslog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s daemons  
log, one page at a time:  
show daemonslog page  
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/daemons.log  
[dmgrDbg] getenv(PX_DBG)=NULL  
[dmgrDbg] getenv(PX_MY_DEBUG)=NULL  
[dmgrDbg] getenv(PX_MY_TRACE)=NULL  
[dmgrDbg] getenv(PX_DBG_LEVEL)=NULL  
[dmgrDbg][Thu Dec 20 13:42:53 2001]##### INFO ##### re-evaluate  
DbgLevel=0x0  
++>>it(1) = 8077978 <HSECollector>  
++>>it(1) = 8077898 <HSEANIServer>  
++>>it(1) = 8077428 <PostgreSQL>  
++>>it(1) = 8077228 <WebServer>  
++>>it(1) = 8077328 <Tomcat>  
++>>it(1) = 80770d8 <ExcepReporter>  
++>>it(1) = 8076fc8 <CDPbrdcast>  
++>>it(1) = 8076e58 <PerfMon>  
#!/bin/sh -v  
#!/bin/sh -v  
if [ "$NMSROOT" = "" ]; then  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
NMSROOT=/opt/CSCOets  
export NMSROOT  
fi  
cd $NMSROOT  
--More--  
show dmgtdlog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s daemon manager log, use the  
show dmgtdlog command.  
show dmgtdlog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s daemon  
manager log, one page at a time:  
show dmgtdlog page  
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/dmgtd.log  
Dec 20 13:42:56 ex dmgt[712]: #3001:TYPE=INFO:Using port: tcp/42340.  
Dec 20 13:42:56 ex dmgt[714]: #3007:TYPE=INFO:Started application(HSEC  
ollector) "/bin/nice -n 19 /opt/CSCOets/bin/collector" pid=715.  
Dec 20 13:42:56 ex dmgt[714]: #3007:TYPE=INFO:Started application(HSEA  
--More--  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show hseaccesslog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web access log, use the show  
hseaccesslog command.  
show hseaccesslog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web  
access log, one page at a time:  
show hseaccesslog page  
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/access_log  
209.165.200.224 - - [21/Dec/2001:10:38:54 +0000] "GET / HTTP/1.0" 302  
276 "-" "Moz  
illa/4.76 [en]C-CCK-MCD  
(Windows NT 5.0; U)"  
209.165.200.224 - - [21/Dec/2001:10:38:54 +0000] "GET  
/perl/login-form.cgi HTTP/1.  
0" 200 2268 "-" "Mozilla/4.76 [en]C-CCK-MCD  
209.165.200.224 - - [21/Dec/2001:10:38:55 +0000] "GET /icons/hse.gif  
HTTP/1.0" 200  
(Windows NT 5.0; U)"  
5554 "http://209.165.201.0:1741/perl/login-form.cgi" "Mozilla/4.76  
[en]C-CCK-MC  
D
(Windows NT 5.0; U)"  
209.165.200.224 - - [21/Dec/2001:10:38:55 +0000] "GET  
/icons/left_top.gif HTTP/1.0  
" 200 324 "http://209.165.201.0:1741/perl/login-form.cgi"  
"Mozilla/4.76 [en]C-CC  
K-MCD  
(Windows NT 5.0; U)"  
--More--  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
B-57  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show hseerrorlog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web error log, use the show  
hseerrorlog command.  
show hseerrorlog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web error  
log, one page at a time:  
show hseerrorlog page  
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/error_log  
[Thu Dec 20 13:43:00 2001] [error] (22)Invalid argument: <Perl>:  
Invalid command  
'secret', perhaps mis-spelled or defined by a module not included in  
the server  
configuration  
[Thu Dec 20 13:43:00 2001] [error] (22)Invalid argument: <Perl>:  
Invalid command  
'line', perhaps mis-spelled or defined by a module not included in  
the server c  
onfiguration  
[Thu Dec 20 13:43:00 2001] [error] (22)Invalid argument: <Perl>:  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show hsesslaccesslog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web SSL log, use the show  
hsesslaccesslog command.  
show hsesslaccesslog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web SSL  
log, one page at a time:  
show hsesslaccesslog page  
show import  
To display an imported host file, use the show import command.  
show import hosts  
Syntax Description  
hosts  
Name of server that host files were imported from.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Example  
This command displays the imported host file  
show import ftpserver_1  
show install logs  
To display the software updates and images available on the configured  
repository, use the show install logs command.  
show install logs [short | long] [page]  
Syntax Description  
short  
long  
page  
Displays only the names of software updates and images on  
the configured repository  
Displays the names and descriptions of software updates and  
images on the configured repository.  
Displays command output one screen at a time.  
Example  
The following command displays the software updates and images available on  
the configured browser, one screen at a time:  
show install updates page  
2
NAME=EX-2.0a  
show ipchains  
To display the IP chains for the selected interface, use the show ipchains  
command.  
show ipchains eth<0-5>  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
eth<0-5>  
Name of the interface port to be configured. Acceptable  
values are eth0-5.  
Example  
The following command displays the IP chains for the ethernet 0 interface:  
show ipchains eth0  
Chain ineth0 (1 references):  
target  
ports  
prot opt  
source  
destination  
ACCEPT  
ACCEPT  
ACCEPT  
ACCEPT  
tcp -y--l- anywhere  
tcp ------ anywhere  
tcp ------ anywhere  
tcp -y--l- anywhere  
ex.help  
ex.help  
ex.help  
ex.help  
any ->  
any ->  
any ->  
any ->  
telt  
telt  
3345  
ssh  
show hosts  
To display your Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s host file, use the show hosts  
command.  
show hosts [page]  
Syntax Description  
Example  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time.  
The following command displays your Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s host file  
one page at a time:  
show hosts page  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show maillog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s mail log, use the show maillog  
command.  
show maillog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s collector  
log, one page at a time:  
show maillog page  
/var/log/maillog  
Dec 21 04:02:06 ex sendmail[11643]: EAA11643: from=root, size=307, cla  
ss=0, pri=30307, nrcpts=1, msgid=<[email protected]>, rela  
y=root@localhost  
Dec 21 04:02:06 ex sendmail[11660]: EAA11643: SYSERR(root): Cannot exe  
c /usr/bin/procmail: No such file or directory  
Dec 21 04:02:06 ex sendmail[11643]: EAA11643: to=root, ctladdr=root (0  
/0), delay=00:00:06, xdelay=00:00:00, mailer=local, stat=Operating  
system error  
show proc  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s active process statistics, use the  
show proc command.  
show proc [page]  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s active  
process statistics one page at a time:  
show proc page  
PID  
ELAPSED  
22:29:10  
22:29:10  
22:29:10  
22:29:10  
22:29:10  
22:29:03  
22:29:00  
22:29:00  
22:28:59  
22:28:59  
22:28:59  
22:28:57  
22:28:51  
22:28:51  
22:28:50  
22:28:48  
22:28:48  
18:23  
SZ  
STARTED TTY COMMAND  
1
2
3
4
5
277 Thu Dec 20 13:42:29 2001 ?  
init  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:29 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:29 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:29 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:29 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:36 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:39 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:39 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:40 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:40 2001 ?  
0 Thu Dec 20 13:42:40 2001 ?  
kflushd  
kupdate  
kpiod  
kswapd  
6
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
kreiserfsd  
watchdog  
idled  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
208  
322  
510  
519  
637  
651  
17076  
17077  
290 Thu Dec 20 13:42:42 2001 ?  
342 Thu Dec 20 13:42:48 2001 ?  
290 Thu Dec 20 13:42:48 2001 ?  
361 Thu Dec 20 13:42:49 2001 ?  
327 Thu Dec 20 13:42:51 2001 ?  
286 Thu Dec 20 13:42:51 2001 ?  
364 Fri Dec 21 11:53:16 2001 ?  
575 Fri Dec 21 11:53:16 2001 0  
syslogd  
klogd  
crond  
inetd  
\_ in.telnetd  
18:23  
|
\_ login  
-----------more-----------  
show repository  
To display the status or the access log of a configured repository, use the show  
repository command.  
show repository {status | access-log} [page]  
Syntax Description  
status  
Displays the status of the local repository  
access-log  
Displays the access-log of the local repository  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time.  
Example  
This command displays the status of the configured repository:  
show repository status  
Repository Source: 171.69.212.146:9851  
repository is running.  
show route  
To display the routes currently configured, use the show route command.  
show route  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
This command displays the currently configured routes  
show route  
Destination  
Gateway Genmask  
Flags Metric Ref  
Use Iface  
0 eth0  
0 eth0  
0 lo  
209.165.200.224 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.224 UH  
209.165.200.225 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.224 U  
209.165.200.254 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.224 U  
209.165.202.128 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.224 UG  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 eth0  
show securitylog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s security log information, use the  
show securitylog command.  
show securitylog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s security  
log, one page at a time:  
show securitylog page  
/var/log/secure  
Dec 20 13:45:23 ex in.tftpd[1381]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:45:27 ex in.tftpd[1383]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:45:31 ex in.tftpd[1385]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:45:35 ex in.tftpd[1387]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:45:39 ex in.tftpd[1389]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:45:44 ex in.tftpd[1391]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:45:48 ex in.tftpd[1393]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:45:52 ex in.tftpd[1395]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:45:56 ex in.tftpd[1397]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:46:00 ex in.tftpd[1399]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:46:04 ex in.tftpd[1412]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:46:27 ex in.tftpd[1424]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:46:31 ex in.tftpd[1426]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:46:35 ex in.tftpd[1428]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:46:39 ex in.tftpd[1430]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:46:43 ex in.tftpd[1432]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
Dec 20 13:46:47 ex in.tftpd[1434]: connect from 209.165.200.224  
--More--  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show snmp-server  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s SNMP configuration, use the  
show snmp-server command.  
show snmp-server  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s SNMP  
configuration:  
show snmp-server  
RW community string: private  
RO community string: public  
sysLocation: your site information  
sysContact: your contact information  
trap-forwarding is disabled  
show ssh-version  
To display the type of SSH enabled, use the ssh-version command.  
show ssh-version  
Syntax Description  
Example  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
This command displays the type of SSH that is enabled:  
show ssh-version  
SSH1, SSH2  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show syslog  
To display syslog information, use the show syslog command.  
show syslog [page] [include matchstring1 [matchstring2]]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Usage Guidelines  
Use this command to display syslog information.  
To filter the command output to include only the records that contain the specified  
string(s) of characters, use the include option with one or two character strings to  
search for. If you include two strings, the command outputs only those records  
that contain both character strings.  
Example  
This command displays syslog information:  
show syslog  
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex syslogd 1.3-3: restart.  
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex syslog: syslogd startup succeeded  
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex kernel: klogd 1.3-3, log source = /proc/kmsg start.  
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex kernel: Inspecting /boot/System.map-2.2.16-13bipse2  
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex syslog: klogd startup succeeded  
-----------more-----------  
Related Command  
interface  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
show tech  
To display information necessary for Cisco’s Technical Assistance Center to  
assist you, use the show tech command.  
show tech [page]  
Syntax Description  
Example  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
This command displays system information necessary for Cisco’s Technical  
Assistance Center to assist you.  
show tech page  
/bin/cat: /var/log/secure: Permission denied  
Copyright (c) 1999-2000 by Cisco Systems, Inc.  
Build Version (166) Mon Jun 11 16:56:23 PDT 2001  
Linux/UID32 version 2.2.16-13bipsec.uid32 (gcc version egcs1  
Uptime: 0 days 18 hours 35 mins  
2 Ethernet interfaces  
hostname ex  
interface ethernet0 209.165.200.224 255.255.255.224 default-gateway  
209.165.202.128  
ip name-server 209.165.201.0  
username admin epassword ************* privilege 15  
eth0  
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:02:B3:35:FD:CC  
inet addr:209.165.200.224 Bcast:209.165.201.31  
Mask:255.255.255.224  
-----------more-----------  
show telnetenable  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Telnet status, use the show  
telnetenable command.  
show telnetenable  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
Example  
The following command shows if Telnet is enabled or disabled:  
show telnetenable  
telnet enable for: ALL  
show tomcatlog  
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Tomcat log, use the show  
tomcatlog command.  
show tomcatlog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]  
Syntax Description  
page  
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the  
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to  
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.  
include  
Filters the command output to display only the records that  
contain the specified string of characters.  
matchstring1  
matchstring2  
String of characters to search for in the command output.  
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the  
command output.  
Example  
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s tomcat  
log, one page at a time:  
show tomcatlog page  
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/tomcat.log  
2001-12-20 01:43:06 - ContextManager: Adding context Ctx( /examples )  
2001-12-20 01:43:06 - ContextManager: Adding context Ctx( /admin )  
Starting tomcat. Check logs/tomcat.log for error messages  
2001-12-20 01:43:06 - ContextManager: Adding context Ctx( )  
getUIProperties(): unhandled error could be a bad ui.properties  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
java.lang.NullPointerException  
at java.io.Reader.<init>(Reader.java:68)  
at java.io.InputStreamReader.<init>(InputStreamReader.java:96)  
--More--  
shutdown  
To shut down the system in preparation for powering it off, use the shutdown  
command.  
shutdown  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
Use this command to shut down the WLSE in preparation for powering it off. All  
processes running on the WLSE will stop, and it will not respond until you power  
it off and back on.  
You are prompted to verify the shutdown. Enter yes to continue, or no to cancel  
the shutdown.  
Caution  
Never power the system off without running the shutdown command first.  
Doing so can destroy data and prevent the system from booting.  
Example  
This command shuts down the system:  
shutdown  
Related Commands  
reload  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
snmp-server  
To configure an simple network management protocol (SNMP) agent, use the  
snmp-server command.  
snmp-server {community community-name [RO|RW] | location  
sysLocation-info | contact sysContact-info}  
no snmp-server {community community-name | location | contact}  
Syntax Description  
community  
community-name  
RO  
sets the community strings that permit access to the SNMP.  
the community name string.  
read only.  
RW  
read / write.  
location  
sets the system location string.  
the location string.  
sysLocation-info  
contact  
sets the contact string.  
sysContact-info  
the contact string.  
Example  
This command sets an SNMP contact string:  
snmp-server contact Dial System Operator at Beeper # 27345  
ssh  
To use SSH to connect to an external host, use the ssh command.  
ssh [options] host [command]  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
options  
Standard SSH options. For a list of these options, enter the  
ssh command without any arguments.  
host  
Name or IP address of host to which to connect.  
Command for the external host to execute.  
command  
Example  
Enter the following command to connect to an external host using SSH:  
ssh 209.165.200.224  
ssh-version  
Use the ssh-version command to enable Secure Shell (SSH) 1, SSH 2, or both  
SSH 1 and SSH 2.  
ssh-version {ssh1 | ssh2 | both}  
Syntax Description  
ssh1  
ssh2  
both  
Enables SSH 1  
Enables SSH 2  
Enables both SSH 1 and SSH2  
Example  
This command enables ssh1:  
ssh-version ssh1  
telnet  
To Telnet to an external host, use the telnet command.  
telnet {hostname | ip-address} [portnumber]  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Syntax Description  
hostname  
Hostname of the external device.  
IP address of the external device.  
portnumber of the external device.  
ip-address  
portnumber  
Example  
Enter the following command to telnet to port 9851 of a system with the IP  
address 209.165.200.224:  
telnet 209.165.200.224 9851  
telnetenable  
To configure Telnet access, use the telnetenable command.  
telnetenable {enable [ip-addresses | domains] | disable | status}  
Syntax Description  
enable  
Enables Telnet access to the system.  
Disables Telnet access to the system.  
Displays current access status.  
disable  
status  
ip-addresses  
IP addresses of systems allowed Telnet access. If this  
argument is used, no other machines will be allowed access.  
Multiple IP address are allowed.  
domains  
Domains of systems allowed Telnet access. If this argument  
is used, machines with domains other than the specified  
domain will be denied Telnet access. Multiple domains are  
allowed.  
Default  
The default is disable.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
B-73  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Privilege Level 15 Commands  
Usage Guidelines  
To enable Telnet access to the system for all IP source addresses, use the  
telnetenable enable command alone. To enable specific IP addresses, use the  
telnetenable enable command followed by the IP addresses.  
Example  
This command enables Telnet for all IP source addresses:  
telnetenable enable  
username  
To create a new user account or change an account’s properties, use the username  
command. Use the no form of the command to remove a user account.  
username name password password [privilege {0 | 15}]  
no username name  
Syntax Description  
name  
Name of the user account to create or remove.  
Specifies a password for the account.  
password  
password  
privilege  
0
The password for the account.  
(Optional) Specifies the account privilege level.  
Gives the account level 0 privileges. This is the default.  
Gives the account level 15 privileges.  
15  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B Command Reference  
Maintenance Image Commands  
Usage Guidelines  
Use the username command to change the properties of a user account. To assign  
a user CLI privilege level 15, use the username command. You cannot assign CLI  
privilege level 15 through the Web interface. Use the no form of the command to  
remove a user account. The default privilege level is 0 if you do not provide the  
privilege option.  
For more information about managing user accounts and privilege levels, refer to  
Administering Users, page 5-60.  
Example  
This command creates a user account named user1 with password password1 and  
privilege level 15:  
username user1 password password1 privilege 15  
This command removes the user account:  
no username user1  
Maintenance Image Commands  
This section describes the commands that are available when the system is booted  
from the maintenance image. For more information about the maintenance image,  
refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide for the Cisco 1105 Wireless  
LAN Solution Engine.  
erase config  
This command is identical to the level 15 erase config command. For a  
description, see the “erase config” section on page B-22.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix B Command Reference  
Maintenance Image Commands  
fsck  
To check and repair the filesystem, use the fsck command.  
fsck  
Syntax Description  
Usage Guidelines  
This command has no arguments or keywords.  
Use the fsck command to check and repair the filesystem. The command might  
prompt you for confirmation before making certain repairs.  
Example  
The following command checks and repairs the filesystem:  
fsck  
reload  
This command is identical to the level 15 reload command. For a description, see  
“reload” section on page B-39.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
B-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
G L O S S A R Y  
A
Access points are wireless LAN transceivers that serve as the center point of a  
standalone wireless network or as the connection point between wireless and  
wired networks. In large installations, wireless users within radio range of an  
access point can roam throughout a facility while maintaining seamless,  
uninterrupted access to the network.  
access point  
B
See wireless bridge.  
bridge  
C
The CDP distance determines the depth of the discovery and applies to all seed  
devices. If CDP distance is 1, only the immediate neighbors of the seed device  
are discovered. If CDP distance is 2, devices A and B that are directly connected  
to the seed devices are discovered and the immediate neighbors of A and B are  
also discovered.  
CDP distance  
The command line interface for administering the WLSE. You use the CLI  
through a console attached to the WLSE’s console port or by opening a Telnet  
connection to the WLSE. CLI commands are described in the User Guide for the  
CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine.  
CLI  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
GL-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Glossary  
Text strings that act as passwords to authenticate communication with devices  
that contain an SNMP agent.  
com m unity strings  
E
Servers running extensible authentication protocol to provide dynamic,  
session-specific wireless encryption keys, central user administration. and  
authentication between clients and access points.  
EAP server  
See also LEAP server.  
A group of related faults.  
exception  
L
Light EAP server used by the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to combine  
centralized two-way authentication with dynamically generated wireless  
equivalent privacy keys or WEP keys.  
LEAP server  
See also EAP server.  
N
nslookup  
The NSLookup tool is used to look up device or host information via the name  
server. You must enter a device name, not an IP address, to use this function.  
You must have a DNS server in order to look up network servers.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
GL-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Glossary  
P
A common method for troubleshooting the accessibility of devices.  
ping  
A ping tests an ICMP echo message and its reply. Because ping is the simplest  
test for a device, it is the first to be used. If ping fails, try using traceroute.  
Run ping to view the packets transmitted, packets received, percentage of packet  
loss, and round-trip time in milliseconds.  
R
The Repository provides software update services to the Solution Engine. You  
can download software from the Repository and install it on the Solution Engine,  
and you can browse the available software versions on the Repository.  
repository  
S
A CDP-enabled device used as a starting point for discovery. For example, by  
adding a seed device (or set of seed devices), the neighbors of the seed device  
are discovered using CDP.  
seed  
Service Set ID. It is a unique identifier that client devices use to associate with  
the access point. The SSID helps client devices distinguish between multiple  
wireless networks in the same vicinity. The SSID can be any alphanumeric entry  
up to 32 characters long.  
SSID  
SSL  
Secure Socket Layer. Proves a secure connection between the WLSE and Web  
clients.  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
GL-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
T
A range within which you expect your network to perform. If a threshold is  
exceeded or goes below the expected bounds, you examine the areas for  
potential problems. You can create thresholds for a specific device.  
threshold  
traceroute  
This is a diagnostic tool that helps you understand why ping fails or why  
applications time out. Using it, can view each hop (or gateway) on the route to  
your device and how long each took.  
U
Coordinated Universal Time. Time zone at zero degrees longitude. Formerly  
called Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and Zulu time.  
UTC  
W
Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) keys are the IEEE 802.11b standard that offers  
a mechanism for securing wireless LAN data streams. The goals of WEP include  
access control to prevent unauthorized users who lack a correct WEP key from  
gaining access to the network, and privacy to protect wireless LAN data streams  
by encrypting them and allowing de-encryption only by users with the correct  
WEP keys.  
WEP keys  
Designed to connect two or more networks (typically located in different  
buildings). Bridges connect hard-to-wire sites, noncontiguous floors, satellite  
offices, school or corporate campus settings, temporary networks, and  
warehouses. For functional flexibility, the wireless bridge may also be  
configured as an access point.  
w ireless bridge  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
GL-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
I N D E X  
system-defined groups for 5-28  
A
template, creating 3-90  
Aggregation Interval, setting 5-58  
Aggregation Truncation Interval, setting 5-58  
ANI log, displaying B-48  
audience for this document xi  
auth command B-16  
access point  
AP and Bridge Connected to Router report,  
displaying 4-20  
AP and Bridge Connected to Switch report,  
displaying 4-18  
configuring 3-1  
authentication  
current client association report,  
displaying B-49  
displaying 4-15  
enabling B-16  
definition 1  
modules supported 5-46  
overview 5-46  
detailed report, displaying 4-13  
Ethernet transmission statistics,  
displaying 4-25  
setting up 5-47  
faults, displaying 2-2  
fault thresholds, setting 2-8  
group report, displaying 4-7  
group security report, displaying 4-9  
B
backing up and restoring data  
backup procedure 5-51, B-17  
backups, listing B-33  
HTTP username and password,  
specifying 5-20  
limitation on number of 5-14  
performance graph, displaying 4-26  
performance table, displaying 4-27  
policies, specifying 2-12  
configuring backup 5-50, B-18, B-50  
restore procedure 5-52  
backup command B-17  
backupconfig command B-18  
booting, WLSE 5-36, B-39, B-51  
bridge  
RF transmission statistics, displaying 4-24  
setting up 5-4  
summary report, displaying 4-11  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
IN-1  
 
Index  
AP and Bridge Connected to Router report,  
CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol)  
configuring B-19, B-52  
neighbors, displaying B-52  
use in discovery 5-3  
cdp command B-19  
CDP distance  
displaying 4-20  
AP and Bridge Connected to Switch report,  
displaying 4-18  
configuring 3-1  
current client association report,  
displaying 4-15  
definition of 1  
definition 1  
setting 5-10  
detailed report, displaying 4-13  
Ethernet transmission statistics 4-25  
CD-ROM, obtaining Cisco documentation  
on xiv  
Ethernet transmission statistics,  
character set, allowable A-1  
displaying 4-25  
Cisco.com, obtaining technical assistance  
group report, displaying 4-7  
group security report, displaying 4-9  
limitation on number of 5-14  
performance graph, displaying 4-26  
RF transmission statistics, displaying 4-24  
setting up 5-4  
through xv  
CiscoWorks2000  
exporting devices to 5-24  
importing devices from 5-23  
CLI  
access, configuring 5-62  
commands B-1 to B-76  
definition 1  
template, creating 3-90  
browser  
date and time display 1-2  
using B-2  
client  
C
current association report, displaying 4-15  
detail report, displaying 4-2  
historical association report, displaying 4-5  
statistics report, displaying 4-3  
clock command B-20  
collector log, displaying B-53  
command reference B-1 to B-76  
CLI conventions B-2  
cautions  
erase config command B-23  
losing data by clicking between subtabs 3-93  
reload command B-39  
shutdown command, failure to run B-70  
significance of xii  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
IN-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
command history feature B-3  
command privileges B-2  
command summary (table) B-4 to B-9  
help for B-3  
ip domain-name B-31  
ip name-server B-32  
listbackup B-33  
mail B-34  
maintenance image commands B-75 to B-76  
erase config B-75  
fsck B-76  
mailcntrl clear B-34  
mailcntrl list B-35  
mailroute B-36  
reload B-76  
nslookup B-36  
Privilege Level 0 commands B-10 to B-16  
exit B-10  
ntp server B-37  
reload B-39  
ping B-10  
restore B-45  
show clock B-11  
route B-46  
show domain-name B-12  
show interfaces B-13  
show process B-13  
show version B-14  
traceroute B-15  
services B-46  
show auth-cli B-49  
show auth-http B-49  
show backupconfig B-50  
show bootlog B-51  
show cdp-neighbor B-52  
show cdp-run B-52  
show config B-54  
show import B-59  
show route B-64  
show ssh-version B-66  
show syslog B-67  
show tech B-68  
Privilege Level 15 commands B-16 to B-75  
auth B-16  
backup B-17  
backupconfig B-18  
cdp B-19  
clock B-20  
erase config B-22  
firewall B-23  
gethostbyname B-24  
hostname B-25  
shutdown B-70  
snmp-server B-71  
ssh-version B-72  
telnetenable B-73  
import B-25  
interface B-29  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
IN-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
username B-74  
switch summary 4-17  
syntax, checking B-2 to B-3  
typographical conventions B-9  
community strings  
D
definition 1  
daemon log, displaying 5-35  
daemon manager log, displaying 5-35, B-56  
data  
requirement for 5-18  
setting on devices 5-4  
specifying 5-18  
backing up 5-50  
configuring devices  
configuration jobs 3-92  
devices, setting up for discovery 5-4  
templates, using 3-1  
troubleshooting 7-2  
connectivity, testing 5-66  
conventions  
restoring 5-50  
database, reinitializing B-40  
date and time  
displaying B-11  
in WLSE displays 1-2  
setting B-20  
synchronizing to a time server B-37  
deleting  
CLI B-2  
in command descriptions B-9  
credentials 5-17  
devices 5-13  
groups 5-33  
current reports, displaying 4-6  
users 5-65, B-74  
AP and Bridge Connected to Router  
detailed report, displaying 4-13  
Device Credentials option 5-17  
Device History option 5-16  
devices  
report 4-20  
AP and Bridge Connected to Switch  
report 4-18  
current client association 4-15  
detailed 4-13  
configuring  
configuration jobs 3-93  
setting up for discovery 5-4  
templates 3-1  
EAP authentication 4-16  
group 4-7  
group security 4-9  
router summary 4-19  
summary 4-11  
troubleshooting 7-2  
connectivity, testing 5-66  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
IN-4  
credentials, setting 5-17  
deleting 5-13  
status and history 5-12  
troubleshooting 7-10  
verifying 5-12  
details, viewing 5-13  
exporting to CiscoWorks2000 5-24  
grouping 5-28  
Discovery History option 5-12  
disk usage, viewing B-21  
importing  
from CiscoWorks2000 5-23  
from file 5-22  
lookup, specifying 5-18  
name servers, specifying B-32  
documentation  
limitation on number of wireless  
devices 5-14  
feedback, providing electronically or by  
management history 5-16  
managing 5-13  
mail xiv  
obtaining xiii  
newly discovered 5-13  
setting up 5-4  
on a CD-ROM xiv  
on the World Wide Web xiii  
ordering xiv  
unmanaged 5-13  
diagnostics, WLSE  
processes, viewing 5-56  
self-test 5-53  
related xii to xiii  
domain name  
default, defining B-31  
displaying B-12  
status reports 5-53  
discovery  
CDP protocol 5-3  
device setup for 5-4  
enabling 5-10  
EAP server  
immediate 5-11  
authentication report, displaying 4-16  
definition 2  
importing devices 5-21  
newly discovered devices 5-13  
one-time 5-11  
email  
emailing a report 4-28  
forwarding B-36  
options 5-2  
overview 5-3  
forwarding faults 2-18  
logs and queues B-34, B-62  
seed devices 5-10  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
IN-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
scheduling 4-29  
getting started with WLSE 1-1  
group performance report  
number of associations 4-23  
RF throughput 4-22  
testing and debugging B-34  
troubleshooting 7-7  
erase config command B-22, B-75  
exception, definition 2  
exit command B-10  
group report, displaying 4-7  
groups  
exporting devices 5-24  
creating 5-30  
deleting 5-30  
editing 5-30  
F
group security report, displaying 4-9  
overview 5-28  
Fault History Truncation Interval, setting 5-58  
faults  
report, displaying 4-7  
system-defined 5-28  
group security report, displaying 4-9  
displaying 2-1  
exception, definition of 2  
faults log, displaying 5-35  
forwarding 2-15  
emailing faults 2-18  
syslog notifications 2-17  
trap notification 2-16  
help  
CLI, displaying B-3  
online xiii  
troubleshooting email 7-2  
parameters for fault reporting 5-58  
thresholds, specifying 2-7  
firewall command B-23  
forwarding, faults 2-15  
fsck command B-76  
technical assistance, obtaining xv  
Cisco.com xv  
TAC xv  
host file  
displaying B-59, B-61  
importing B-25  
hostname  
G
changing system hostname B-25  
translating to IP addresses B-36  
gethostbyname command B-24  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
IN-6  
hostname command B-25  
HTTP  
jobs  
setting on access points 5-4  
creating 3-99  
username and password for access points,  
specifying 5-20  
deleting 3-103  
HTTPS  
editing 3-102  
certificate, obtaining 5-48  
log, viewing 5-35  
filtering 3-102  
log, displaying 5-35  
managing 3-92  
naming guidelines A-1  
scheduling email jobs 4-29  
troubleshooting 7-2  
undoing 3-103  
I
import command B-25  
importing devices 5-21  
installing software updates 5-41, B-28, B-29, B-60  
interface command B-29  
viewing status 3-99  
inventory  
L
immediate inventory, running 5-17  
resetting the polling interval 5-58  
LEAP server  
adding 5-26  
definition 2  
Inventory Performance Attributes Polling  
Interval, setting 5-58  
Inventory Polling Interval, setting 5-58  
IP addresses  
EAP authentication report, displaying 4-16  
modifying 5-27  
displaying B-24  
removing 5-28  
translating to hostnames B-36  
IP chains, displaying B-60  
ip domain-name command B-31  
ip name-server command B-32  
setting response time 2-12  
setting up 5-9  
listbackup command B-33  
logging in  
splash screen, adding a message 5-57  
to WLSE 1-3  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
IN-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
logging out  
CLI command for B-10  
from the WLSE 1-4  
logs, displaying  
name servers, specifying B-32  
naming guidelines A-1  
network  
collector log B-53  
connectivity testing 5-66  
setting up 5-4  
daemon manager log 5-35, B-56  
daemons log 5-35, B-55  
install logs B-60  
network interfaces  
configuring B-29  
displaying B-13  
syslog B-67  
system log 5-57  
IP chains, displaying B-60  
nslookup  
Tomcat log 5-35, B-69  
View Log File option 5-35  
Web access log 5-35, B-57  
Web error log 5-35, B-58  
Web SSL access log B-59  
definition 2  
NSlookup tool 5-66  
nslookup command B-36  
NTP (Network Time Protocol),  
configuring B-37  
M
ntp server command B-37  
MAC address, displaying B-13  
mailcntrl clear command B-34  
mailcntrl list command B-35  
mail command B-34  
P
parameters, system 5-58  
passwords  
mailroute command B-36  
changing your password 5-65  
HTTP 5-20  
maintenance image, CLI commands for B-75  
Manage/Unmanage option 5-13  
Managed Devices option 5-13  
Manage Roles option 5-60  
LEAP server 5-26  
WLSE users 5-62  
performance graph, displaying for access points  
Manage Users option 5-62  
and bridges 4-26  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
IN-8  
Index  
performance table, displaying for access points  
remote 5-40, B-27  
definition 3  
and bridges 4-27  
ping  
listing images and updates B-28, B-43  
local  
command B-10  
definition 3  
deleting software from B-42  
status B-44  
Ping tool 5-66  
policies, specifying 2-13  
port filtering, configuring B-23  
processes, displaying 5-54, B-13, B-62  
transferring software to B-41  
status, displaying B-63  
restarting (rebooting) WLSE 5-36, B-51  
Restart option 5-36  
restore command B-45  
restoring data from backups 5-50, B-45  
roles  
R
radio, configuring 3-36  
reader comment form, submitting  
creating and modifying 5-60  
deleting 5-60  
electronically xiv  
rebooting, WLSE 5-36, B-39  
reload command  
naming guidelines A-1  
predefined 5-60  
maintenance image command B-76  
Privilege Level 15 command B-39  
reports  
route command B-46  
router  
AP and Bridge Connected to, displaying 4-20  
setting up 5-7  
current, displaying 4-6  
parameters for 5-58  
scheduling email 4-29  
trends, displaying 4-21  
troubleshooting 7-7  
wireless client, displaying 4-1  
repository  
summary report, displaying 4-19  
system-defined group for 5-28  
routes  
adding B-46  
displaying B-15, B-64  
Run Discovery Now option 5-11  
browsing 5-43  
creating  
local 5-39, B-40  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
IN-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
show config command B-54  
show domain-name command B-12  
show import command B-59  
show interfaces command B-13  
show process command B-13  
show route command B-64  
show ssh-version command B-66  
show syslog command B-67  
show tech command B-68  
show version command B-14  
shutdown command B-70  
SNMP  
S
scheduling  
discovery 5-10  
email 4-29  
jobs 3-93  
security  
authentication  
enabling B-16  
modules 5-46  
HTTPS 5-48  
last 10 logged in users, viewing 5-49  
log, displaying B-64  
SSH 5-49  
agent, configuring B-71  
agent log, displaying 5-35  
community strings  
SSL 5-48  
Telnet, enabling or disabling 5-49  
seed  
guidelines for 5-20  
specifying 5-18  
adding seeds 5-10  
definition 3  
configuration, displaying B-66  
trap notification, setting 2-16  
snmp-server command B-71  
software, on devices  
services, managing B-46  
services command B-46  
Short Term Trending Inventory Truncation  
groups for 5-28  
Interval, setting 5-58  
software, on WLSE  
show auth-cli command B-49  
show auth-http B-49  
browsing the repository 5-43  
data, backing up and restoring 5-50  
installation log, displaying 5-35  
local repository, creating 5-39  
maintenance image B-75  
managing 5-37  
show backupconfig command B-50  
show bootlog command B-51  
show cdp-neighbor B-52  
show cdp-run command B-52  
show clock command B-11  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
IN-10  
Index  
overview 5-37  
syslog  
displaying B-67  
notification, setting 2-17  
system  
remote repository, creating 5-40  
status, viewing 5-37  
updates  
history, viewing 5-44  
installing 5-41, B-29  
configuration  
displaying B-54  
transferring to WLSE B-41  
version, viewing B-14  
splash screen, adding a message 5-57  
SSH  
erasing B-22  
hostname, changing B-25  
shutdown B-70  
storage usage, displaying B-22  
system log, using 5-57  
system parameters, setting 5-58  
enabling 5-49, B-72  
type, displaying B-66  
ssh-version command B-72  
SSID  
definition 3  
system-defined groups for 5-28  
SSL  
TAC (Technical Assistance Center)  
information for, displaying B-68  
obtaining support from xv  
certificate, obtaining 5-48  
definition 3  
how the Escalation Center works xvii  
priority levels, understanding xvi  
telephone numbers xvii  
log, displaying 5-35  
managing 5-48  
subnet, system-defined group for 5-28  
summary report, displaying 4-11  
switch  
website xvi  
TCP Port Scan tool 5-66  
Technical Assistance Center (see TAC) xv  
technical support xv  
fault thresholds, setting 2-10  
setting up 5-7  
through Cisco.com xv  
summary report, displaying 4-17  
system-defined group for 5-28  
syntax of commands, checking B-2 to B-3  
through TAC xv  
telephone numbers for TAC (see technical  
support) xvii  
Telnet  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
IN-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
disabling B-73  
enabling 5-49, B-73  
SSH 5-49  
AP and bridge performance graph 4-26  
AP and bridge RF transmission statistics 4-24  
group performance report, number of  
associations 4-23  
status, displaying B-68  
telnetenable command B-73  
templates  
group performance report, RF  
throughput 4-22  
troubleshooting 7-1  
configuration 7-2  
copying 3-91  
creating 3-90  
device management 7-9  
discovery 7-9  
deleting 3-92  
editing 3-91  
reports 7-7  
troubleshooting 7-2  
using 3-1  
users 7-9  
typographical conventions  
in command descriptions B-9  
used in this document xi to xii  
threshold  
definition 4  
specifying fault 2-7  
time  
display on WLSE 1-2  
system time 1-2  
undoing a job 3-103  
unmanaged devices 5-13  
updates, installing 5-41  
user-defined  
UTC, definition 4  
Tomcat log, displaying 5-35, B-69  
traceroute  
command B-15  
groups 5-29  
definition 4  
roles 5-60  
Traceroute tool 5-66  
transmission statistics  
displaying Ethernet for AP and bridge 4-25  
displaying RF for AP and bridge 4-24  
trends, displaying 4-21  
username command B-74  
users  
CLI access 5-62  
creating 5-62, B-74  
deleting 5-65, B-74  
last 10 logged in users. viewing 5-49  
AP and bridge Ethernet transmission  
statistics 4-25  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
IN-12  
Index  
modifying 5-62  
naming guidelines A-1  
password, changing 5-65  
removing 5-62  
roles  
assigning to users 5-62  
managing 5-60  
troubleshooting 7-9  
UTC  
definition 4  
on WLSE 1-2  
W
Web access log, displaying 5-35, B-57  
Web error log, displaying 5-35, B-58  
Web SSL log, displaying B-59  
WEP keys, definition 4  
Wireless Client Polling, setting 5-58  
wireless client reports, displaying 4-1  
client detail 4-2  
client historical association 4-5  
client statistics 4-3  
World Wide Web  
contacting TAC via xvi  
obtaining Cisco documentation via xiii  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78-14092-01  
IN-13  
Index  
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine  
78-14092-01  
IN-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Blanco Indoor Furnishings 157 133 User Manual
Bogen Stereo System CG8A User Manual
Bosch Power Tools Laser Level GPL4 User Manual
BOXLIGHT Projector MP60e User Manual
Canon Printer C5180 Series User Manual
Canon Server A1200 User Manual
Carrier Air Conditioner ZONEKIT4ZCAR User Manual
Chevrolet Automobile 50061011 User Manual
Chief Manufacturing Stud Sensor CTA 225 User Manual
Chief Manufacturing TV Mount PAC516 User Manual